<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Carlitorweb</id>
	<title>Joomla! Documentation - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Carlitorweb"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/Special:Contributions/Carlitorweb"/>
	<updated>2026-10-14T13:21:29Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.0</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J4.x:Setting_Up_Your_Local_Environment&amp;diff=1024203</id>
		<title>J4.x:Setting Up Your Local Environment</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J4.x:Setting_Up_Your_Local_Environment&amp;diff=1024203"/>
		<updated>2024-04-20T13:55:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=magic|icon-color=#5091cd|size=3x|text-color=#333|title=&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Tutorial&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
How to Setup a Local Environment for Joomla 4&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{Joomla version|version=4.x}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt; With Joomla! 4 we have changed the development process. It is no longer possible to clone the repository and have a usable Joomla installation. We follow best practices and implement a build process for the CMS.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Quick Start Guide == &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt; The steps to setup your development environment depend on your operating system. We cannot write documentation for every operating system (OS), please use your favorite search engine to find a HowTo.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tools You Need === &amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt; PHP - basically the same as you need for running a Joomla site, but you need the PHP CLI (command line interface) version. (See the [[S:MyLanguage/Configuring_a_LAMPP_server_for_PHP_development|Configuring a LAMPP server for PHP development]] page.)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt; Composer - for managing Joomla&#039;s PHP dependencies. For help installing Composer, read the documentation at https://getcomposer.org/doc/00-intro.md.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt; Node.js - for compiling Joomla&#039;s JavaScript and SASS files. For help installing Node.js, please follow the instructions available on https://nodejs.org/en/. Note, you will need NodeJS 12 or higher to install Joomla.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt; Git - for version management.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Steps to Set up the Local Environment === &amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt; Clone the repository&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt; Checkout the branch of the latest release (currently &#039;&#039;4.4-dev&#039;&#039;).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt; Run &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;composer install&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; from the root of the git repo. (You can add &#039;&#039;--ignore-platform-reqs&#039;&#039; if you don&#039;t have the PHP-LDAP locally installed, and you don&#039;t need it.)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt; Run &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;npm ci&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; from the root of the git repo. (Note, you need npm 6.13.4 or higher for this. Run &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;npm install -g npm@lts&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to upgrade your version of npm to the LTS version. For Joomla 5, you need npm 10.1.0 or higher. &#039;&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039;&#039; With nvm (Node Version Manager) you can easily switch to other npm versions)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Linux and OSX users can set up the following bash alias by placing the following inside the &#039;&#039;~/.bashrc file&#039;&#039;:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;bash&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
alias jclean=&amp;quot;rm -rf administrator/templates/atum/css; \&lt;br /&gt;
rm -rf templates/cassiopeia/css; \&lt;br /&gt;
rm -rf administrator/templates/system/css; \&lt;br /&gt;
rm -rf templates/system/css; \&lt;br /&gt;
rm -rf media/; \&lt;br /&gt;
rm -rf node_modules/; \&lt;br /&gt;
rm -rf libraries/vendor/; \&lt;br /&gt;
rm -f administrator/cache/autoload_psr4.php; \&lt;br /&gt;
rm -rf installation/template/css&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
alias jinstall=&amp;quot;jclean; composer install; npm ci&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt; This will delete all the compiled files in your system and run a fresh install as one command by calling &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;jinstall&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; inside your Joomla install. You can also use the &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;jclean&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; command to swap back to a Joomla 3.x branch&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A Bit Longer Start Guide == &amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt; Joomla is similar to many other web tools these days. It has a large PHP part and it has more and more JavaScript code. While PHP coding doesn&#039;t need so much preparation, JavaScript needs a lot of tooling around. The main reason is that nobody writes code in a way that every browser understands, so the code needs transpiling from e.g. ES6 to a compatible version of JavaScript. The same is true for CSS. For Joomla we are using SASS and this will be converted to native CSS so that any browser understands it. On the downside, setting up a development environment is a bit more complicated but the tooling makes coding more convenient. Thanks to watchers and browser auto reload, you can see your changes in real time.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PHP ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt; It should be enough to run &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;composer install&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; as this will install PHP dependencies saved in the &#039;&#039;composer.lock&#039;&#039; file. You can do this as many times as you like. It will only install new packages when the &#039;&#039;composer.lock&#039;&#039; file is changed. Don&#039;t run &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;composer update&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; as this will update all packages to newer versions and update the &#039;&#039;composer.lock&#039;&#039; file.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; You may need to run &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;composer install&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; with the &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;--ignore-platform-reqs&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; option to ignore platform requirements specified in Composer. That is, if you do not have PHP&#039;s LDAP extension installed.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Node/npm Scripts === &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt; Node.js comes with a package manager called NPM (in some ways the same as Composer). NPM has a &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;run&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; command and we have prepared some scripts to make your life easier. You have to run the commands for the root of the repository when you have changed JS or SASS files. Previously you needed to run &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;npm ci&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; once, to install dependencies.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;==== npm run build:css ==== &amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It will compile SASS files to CSS and also create the minified files.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== npm run build:js ==== &amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It will compile and transpile the JavaScript files to the correct format and create minified files.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== npm run watch ==== &amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is the same as the &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;build:js&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; command but will watch for changes and automatically build updated files in the media directory. SASS files are not included yet.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;==== npm run lint:js ==== &amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This will perform a syntax check on all ES6 JavaScript files against the JavaScript code standard (for more information on the Joomla 4 codestyle standard please read the the coding standards manual at [https://developer.joomla.org/coding-standards/introduction.html| the coding standards manual].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== npm run test ==== &amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt; This will run a JavaScript testing suite.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Possible Issues== &amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt; When running composer install you can run into these errors&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;bash&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Problem 1&lt;br /&gt;
    - Installation request for joomla/ldap 2.0.0-beta -&amp;gt; satisfiable by joomla/ldap[2.0.0-beta].&lt;br /&gt;
    - joomla/ldap 2.0.0-beta requires ext-ldap * -&amp;gt; the requested PHP extension ldap is missing from your system.&lt;br /&gt;
Problem 2&lt;br /&gt;
    - Installation request for symfony/ldap v5.1.5 -&amp;gt; satisfiable by symfony/ldap[v5.1.5].&lt;br /&gt;
    - symfony/ldap v5.1.5 requires ext-ldap * -&amp;gt; the requested PHP extension ldap is missing from your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt; The solution is to run the composer install with the &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;--ignore-platform-reqs&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; option to ignore platform requirements specified in Composer. That is, if you do not have PHP&#039;s LDAP extension installed. &amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;bash&amp;quot;&amp;gt;composer install --ignore-platform-reqs&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt; If you receive a login error such as shown below, delete the &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;administrator/cache/autoload_psr4.php&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; file.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Install-error.png|border|center|400px|Login After Install Error]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Development{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Version_4.3_FAQ&amp;diff=1001064</id>
		<title>Category:Version 4.3 FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Version_4.3_FAQ&amp;diff=1001064"/>
		<updated>2023-04-18T18:10:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Joomla version|version=4.3|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This contains frequently asked questions for version 4.2.x.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J4.x:Media_Manager_opens_with_error&amp;diff=1001063</id>
		<title>J4.x:Media Manager opens with error</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J4.x:Media_Manager_opens_with_error&amp;diff=1001063"/>
		<updated>2023-04-18T18:09:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!-- Start with an intro below this line --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Errors reported== &amp;lt;!-- Fill errors below --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Error Property &#039;mime_type&#039; of argument &#039;item&#039; of event onFetchMediaItems has a wrong item. Valid: string&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Versions affected== &amp;lt;!--refers to and other information below --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{tip|This pertains only to Joomla! version(s): &#039;&#039;&#039;4.3.0&#039;&#039;&#039;|title=General Information}} &amp;lt;!-- add the version(s) you need --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What is the cause== &amp;lt;!-- Cause if known --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is caused by your server missing the php module fileinfo&lt;br /&gt;
==How to fix== &amp;lt;!-- How to fix it if known --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Request that your hosting provider enables the fileinfo module in php&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Change if needed --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Version 4.3.0 FAQ{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Version_4.3_FAQ&amp;diff=1001062</id>
		<title>Category:Version 4.3 FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Version_4.3_FAQ&amp;diff=1001062"/>
		<updated>2023-04-18T18:08:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Joomla version|version=4.3|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;These FAQs are specific to the Joomla! 4.3 release. Only issues that are specific to this release will be listed here, together with  suggested resolutions. Please add information to this resource. The Joomla! Bug Squad will watch over this page to ensure any new bugs are added to the tracker and resolved. Continue to use the &#039;&#039;&#039;[[jforum:705|Joomla! Forums for  support requests]]&#039;&#039;&#039; as this is not a substitute for posting there, but rather a common location for the community to gather common release issues.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;Note|To appear in this category, this text is required at the foot of the page&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;:&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Version 4.2.8 FAQ{{#translation:}}]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;|reminder}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{TT|CreateFAQ|J4.x}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.3{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Version_4.3_FAQ&amp;diff=1001061</id>
		<title>Category:Version 4.3 FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Category:Version_4.3_FAQ&amp;diff=1001061"/>
		<updated>2023-04-18T18:06:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Joomla version|version=4.3|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;These FAQs are specific to the Joomla! 4.3 release. Only issues that are specific to this release will be listed here, together with  suggested resolutions. Please add information to this resource. The Joomla! Bug Squad will watch over this page to ensure any new bugs are added to the tracker and resolved. Continue to use the &#039;&#039;&#039;[[jforum:705|Joomla! Forums for  support requests]]&#039;&#039;&#039; as this is not a substitute for posting there, but rather a common location for the community to gather common release issues.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;Note|To appear in this category, this text is required at the foot of the page&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;:&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Version 4.2.8 FAQ{{#translation:}}]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;|reminder}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{TT|CreateFAQ|J4.x}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Version 4.3 FAQ{{#translation:}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.3{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J4.x:Media_Manager_opens_with_error&amp;diff=1001060</id>
		<title>J4.x:Media Manager opens with error</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J4.x:Media_Manager_opens_with_error&amp;diff=1001060"/>
		<updated>2023-04-18T18:03:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!-- Start with an intro below this line --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Errors reported== &amp;lt;!-- Fill errors below --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Error Property &#039;mime_type&#039; of argument &#039;item&#039; of event onFetchMediaItems has a wrong item. Valid: string&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Versions affected== &amp;lt;!--refers to and other information below --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{tip|This pertains only to Joomla! version(s): &#039;&#039;&#039;4.3.0&#039;&#039;&#039;|title=General Information}} &amp;lt;!-- add the version(s) you need --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What is the cause== &amp;lt;!-- Cause if known --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is caused by your server missing the php module fileinfo&lt;br /&gt;
==How to fix== &amp;lt;!-- How to fix it if known --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Request that your hosting provider enables the fileinfo module in php&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Change if needed --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Version 4.3 FAQ{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J4.x:Optional_Technical_Requirements&amp;diff=999382</id>
		<title>J4.x:Optional Technical Requirements</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J4.x:Optional_Technical_Requirements&amp;diff=999382"/>
		<updated>2023-02-20T17:03:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt; Optional Requirements for Joomla! 4.x&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page lists &#039;&#039;optional&#039;&#039; technical requirements which are not required to install and run Joomla! but are required for some internal APIs.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;section begin=Joomla 3.x /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=2 style=&amp;quot;background-color:#e1e1e1;&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Application&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|JApplicationDaemon&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/pcntl&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/posix&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=2 style=&amp;quot;background-color:#e1e1e1;&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Archive&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|BZ2&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/bz2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|GZip&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/zlib&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Zip&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/zip&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/zlib&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=2 style=&amp;quot;background-color:#e1e1e1;&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Cache&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|APC&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/apc&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on PHP 5.3 or 5.4, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/apcu&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on PHP 5.5 or 5.6, unsupported on PHP 7.x (Note: THIS NEED TO BE CHECKED)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|APCu&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s ext/apcu on PHP 5.3+&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|CacheLite&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires the PEAR Cache_Lite package (tested on 1.7.16, will work with 1.8)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Memcache&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/memcache&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and a Memcache server (Note: The Memcache extension is not compatible with PHP 7.x)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Memcached&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/memcached&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and a Memcached server&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Redis&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/redis&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and a Redis server&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Wincache&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/wincache&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; (Windows only)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|XCache&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/xcache&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=2 style=&amp;quot;background-color:#e1e1e1;&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Client adapters&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|LDAP&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/ldap&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP/Curl&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/curl&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP/Socket&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;fsockopen()&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; function be enabled&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP/Stream&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;fopen()&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; function and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;allow_url_fopen&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; enabled&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=2 style=&amp;quot;background-color:#e1e1e1;&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Cryptography&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|JCrypt&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/mcrypt&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for all ciphers except the SodiumCipher which requires &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/sodium&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|JKeychain&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/openssl&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=2 style=&amp;quot;background-color:#e1e1e1;&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Database&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Microsoft SQL Azure&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/sqlsrv&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; (the PHP 5.x extension only supports Windows, a Linux compatible version of the extension is available for PHP 7.x)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Microsoft SQL Server&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/sqlsrv&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; (the PHP 5.x extension only supports Windows, a Linux compatible version of the extension is available for PHP 7.x)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|MySQL&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/mysql&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; (unsupported on PHP 7.x)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|MySQLi&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/mysqli&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Oracle&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/pdo&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; with Oracle support (available for 3PD only; the CMS won&#039;t run with it)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|PDO MySQL&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/pdo&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; with MySQL support&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|PostgreSQL&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/pgsql&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|SQLite&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/pdo&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; with SQLite support (available for 3PD only; the CMS won&#039;t run with it)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=2 style=&amp;quot;background-color:#e1e1e1;&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:35--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:36--&amp;gt; Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/gd&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:37--&amp;gt; Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/fileinfo&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=2 style=&amp;quot;background-color:#e1e1e1;&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:38--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Session&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|APC&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:39--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/apc&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on PHP 5.3 or 5.4, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/apcu&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on PHP 5.5 or 5.6, unsupported on PHP 7.x (Note: THIS NEEDS TO BE CHECKED)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Memcache&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:40--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/memcache&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and a Memcache server (Note: The Memcache extension is not compatible with PHP 7.x)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Memcached&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:41--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/memcached&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and a Memcached server&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Wincache&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:42--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/wincache&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; (Windows only)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|XCache&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:43--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/xcache&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=2 style=&amp;quot;background-color:#e1e1e1;&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:44--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
PHP Memory&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|memory_limit&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the maximum amount of memory in bytes that a script is allowed to allocate. This helps prevent poorly written scripts for eating up all available memory on a server.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; For Joomla, the use of a minimum of &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;128M&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; of memory is recommended.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=2 style=&amp;quot;background-color:#c1c1c1;text-align:center&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:44--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OPTIONAL IMPROVEMENTS&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=2 style=&amp;quot;background-color:#e1e1e1;&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:45--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|mbstring&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:46--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Enable PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/mbstring&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the phputf8 library to use native functions&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;section end=Joomla 4.x /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.0{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J4.x:Optional_Technical_Requirements&amp;diff=999381</id>
		<title>J4.x:Optional Technical Requirements</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J4.x:Optional_Technical_Requirements&amp;diff=999381"/>
		<updated>2023-02-20T15:19:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt; Optional Requirements for Joomla! 4.x&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This page lists &#039;&#039;optional&#039;&#039; technical requirements which are not required to install and run Joomla! but are required for some internal APIs.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;section begin=Joomla 3.x /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=2 style=&amp;quot;background-color:#e1e1e1;&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Application&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|JApplicationDaemon&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/pcntl&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/posix&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=2 style=&amp;quot;background-color:#e1e1e1;&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Archive&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|BZ2&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/bz2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|GZip&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/zlib&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Zip&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/zip&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/zlib&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=2 style=&amp;quot;background-color:#e1e1e1;&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Cache&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|APC&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/apc&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on PHP 5.3 or 5.4, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/apcu&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on PHP 5.5 or 5.6, unsupported on PHP 7.x (Note: THIS NEED TO BE CHECKED)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|APCu&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s ext/apcu on PHP 5.3+&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|CacheLite&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires the PEAR Cache_Lite package (tested on 1.7.16, will work with 1.8)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Memcache&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/memcache&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and a Memcache server (Note: The Memcache extension is not compatible with PHP 7.x)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Memcached&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/memcached&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and a Memcached server&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Redis&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/redis&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and a Redis server&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Wincache&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/wincache&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; (Windows only)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|XCache&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/xcache&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=2 style=&amp;quot;background-color:#e1e1e1;&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Client adapters&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|LDAP&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/ldap&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP/Curl&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/curl&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP/Socket&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;fsockopen()&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; function be enabled&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP/Stream&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;fopen()&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; function and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;allow_url_fopen&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; enabled&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=2 style=&amp;quot;background-color:#e1e1e1;&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Cryptography&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|JCrypt&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/mcrypt&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for all ciphers except the SodiumCipher which requires &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/sodium&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|JKeychain&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/openssl&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=2 style=&amp;quot;background-color:#e1e1e1;&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Database&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Microsoft SQL Azure&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/sqlsrv&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; (the PHP 5.x extension only supports Windows, a Linux compatible version of the extension is available for PHP 7.x)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Microsoft SQL Server&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/sqlsrv&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; (the PHP 5.x extension only supports Windows, a Linux compatible version of the extension is available for PHP 7.x)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|MySQL&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/mysql&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; (unsupported on PHP 7.x)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|MySQLi&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/mysqli&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Oracle&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/pdo&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; with Oracle support (available for 3PD only; the CMS won&#039;t run with it)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|PDO MySQL&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/pdo&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; with MySQL support&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|PostgreSQL&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/pgsql&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|SQLite&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/pdo&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; with SQLite support (available for 3PD only; the CMS won&#039;t run with it)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=2 style=&amp;quot;background-color:#e1e1e1;&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:35--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:36--&amp;gt; Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/gd&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:37--&amp;gt; Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/fileinfo&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=2 style=&amp;quot;background-color:#e1e1e1;&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:38--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Session&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|APC&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:39--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/apc&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on PHP 5.3 or 5.4, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/apcu&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on PHP 5.5 or 5.6, unsupported on PHP 7.x (Note: THIS NEEDS TO BE CHECKED)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Memcache&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:40--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/memcache&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and a Memcache server (Note: The Memcache extension is not compatible with PHP 7.x)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Memcached&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:41--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/memcached&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and a Memcached server&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Wincache&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:42--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/wincache&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; (Windows only)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|XCache&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:43--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Requires PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/xcache&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=2 style=&amp;quot;background-color:#e1e1e1;&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:44--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
PHP Memory&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|memory_limit&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the maximum amount of memory in bytes that a script is allowed to allocate. This helps prevent poorly written scripts for eating up all available memory on a server.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; For Joomla, the use of a minimum of &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;128M&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; of memory is required.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=2 style=&amp;quot;background-color:#c1c1c1;text-align:center&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:44--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OPTIONAL IMPROVEMENTS&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=2 style=&amp;quot;background-color:#e1e1e1;&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:45--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|mbstring&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:46--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Enable PHP&#039;s &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;ext/mbstring&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the phputf8 library to use native functions&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;section end=Joomla 4.x /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.0{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Joomla_4.2_version_history&amp;diff=999352</id>
		<title>Joomla 4.2 version history</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Joomla_4.2_version_history&amp;diff=999352"/>
		<updated>2023-02-17T21:10:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Joomla 4.2.8 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* 16 February 2023&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.joomla.org/announcements/release-news/5878-joomla-4-2-8-security-release.html Announcement]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://downloads.joomla.org/cms/joomla4/4-2-8 Packages]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/:Category: Version 4.2.8 FAQ|FAQ and known issues]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Joomla 4.2.7 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* 31 January 2023&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.joomla.org/announcements/release-news/5876-joomla-4-2-7-security-and-bug-fix-release.html Announcement]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://downloads.joomla.org/cms/joomla4/4-2-7 Packages]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/:Category: Version 4.2.7 FAQ|FAQ and known issues]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Joomla 4.2.6 == &amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* 13 December 2022&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.joomla.org/announcements/release-news/5875-joomla-4-2-6-bug-fix-release.html Announcement]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://downloads.joomla.org/cms/joomla4/4-2-6 Packages]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/:Category: Version 4.2.6 FAQ|FAQ and known issues]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Joomla 4.2.5 == &amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* 6 November 2022&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.joomla.org/announcements/release-news/5873-joomla-4-2-5-security-and-bug-fix-release.html Announcement]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://downloads.joomla.org/cms/joomla4/4-2-5 Packages]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/:Category: Version 4.2.5 FAQ|FAQ and known issues]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Joomla 4.2.4 == &amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* 25 October 2022&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.joomla.org/announcements/release-news/5870-joomla-4-2-4-security-release.html Announcement]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://downloads.joomla.org/cms/joomla4/4-2-4 Packages]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/:Category: Version 4.2.4 FAQ|FAQ and known issues]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Joomla 4.2.3 == &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* 27 September 2022&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.joomla.org/announcements/release-news/5869-joomla-4-2-3-bug-fix-release.html Announcement]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://downloads.joomla.org/cms/joomla4/4-2-3 Packages]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/:Category: Version 4.2.3 FAQ|FAQ and known issues]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Joomla 4.2.2 == &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* 02 September 2022&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.joomla.org/announcements/release-news/5867-joomla-4-2-2-bug-fix-release.html Announcement]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://downloads.joomla.org/cms/joomla4/4-2-2 Packages]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/:Category: Version 4.2.2 FAQ|FAQ and known issues]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Joomla 4.2.1 == &amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* 30 August 2022&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.joomla.org/announcements/release-news/5866-joomla-4-2-1-release.html Announcement]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://downloads.joomla.org/cms/joomla4/4-2-1 Packages]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/:Category: Version 4.2.1 FAQ|FAQ and known issues]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Joomla 4.2.0 == &amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* 16 August 2022&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.joomla.org/announcements/release-news/5865-joomla-4-2-release.html Announcement]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://downloads.joomla.org/cms/joomla4/4-2-0 Packages]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[S:MyLanguage/:Category: Version 4.2.0 FAQ|FAQ and known issues]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.2{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Version History{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Joomla! 4.2]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Version_History]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Fields:_Edit&amp;diff=999224</id>
		<title>Help4.x:Fields: Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Fields:_Edit&amp;diff=999224"/>
		<updated>2023-01-28T04:10:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description== &amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can add and edit Fields in Articles, Contacts, and Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:326--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The helpscreen show as example Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access== &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:208--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;rarr&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Users,Fields}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To add a Field:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt; click the &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039; toolbar button&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:243--&amp;gt; To edit a Field:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt; Select a &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; from the list&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{anchor|screenshot}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot== &amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-screen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|800px]]&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Form Fields== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:244--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;. The Title for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General=== &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:333--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Left Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:256--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Parameters for all fields:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:247--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Type&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:245--&amp;gt; If you create a field you can choose one of the &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; field types. When you save the field this type is permanent.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:246--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Adding_custom_fields/Calendar_Field&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:248--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:249--&amp;gt; The name will be used to identify the field. Leave this blank and Joomla will fill in a default value from the title.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:250--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:251--&amp;gt; Use a descriptive text of the field for the label of the field. This text is not translatable. If you do not enter any text for a label the title text will also used as label text.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:252--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:253--&amp;gt; The description of the field. A text that will be shown as a tool tip when the user moves the mouse over the text box while he use it in the Backend creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. This text is not translatable. You do not see this description in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:254--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:255--&amp;gt; Is this a mandatory field? In this case the field has to be filled before submitting an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:334--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:257--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:258--&amp;gt; The published status of this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:259--&amp;gt; Published:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:260--&amp;gt; The field is visible while editing an article or an contact. And it is visible in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:261--&amp;gt; Unpublished:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:262--&amp;gt; The field will not be visible to users while editing an article or an contact.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:263--&amp;gt; Archived:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:264--&amp;gt; The field will no longer show on edition an article or an contact. You can open it in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#selectstatus&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Fields]] when you set the filter to archived.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:265--&amp;gt; Trashed:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:266--&amp;gt; The field is deleted but still in the database. It can be permanently deleted from the database in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#selectstatus&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Fields]] with the Empty Trash function.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:267--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J4.x:Deleting_an_Article&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:268--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Field Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:269--&amp;gt; You can assign a field to one or more field groups.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:270--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:271--&amp;gt; You can assign a field to one or more categories. Note that the default &#039;All&#039; does not include &#039;uncategorised&#039; articles.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:272--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Access&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:273--&amp;gt; Select the viewing access level for this field. The access levels depend on what has been set up in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Users: Access Levels]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:274--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:275--&amp;gt; Select the language for this field. If you are not using the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Extensions:_Languages&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|multi-language feature]] of Joomla, keep the default of &#039;All&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:276--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:277--&amp;gt; An optional field to make your personal notes for the field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options=== &amp;lt;!--T:90--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-options-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:91--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:278--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Form Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:279--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Placeholder&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:280--&amp;gt; A placeholder text which will appear inside the field as a hint for the input. The placeholder is active in the Backend while creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. You do do not see it in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:281--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Field Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:282--&amp;gt; The class attributes of the field when the field is rendered. If different classes are needed, list them with spaces.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:283--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label Class (Form)&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:327--&amp;gt; CSS class to apply to the field label when it is in edit mode (entering input into a field).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:284--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Editable In&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:285--&amp;gt; On which part of the site should the field be shown. In the Backend, in the Frontend or both?&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:335--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Showon Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;. Conditionally show or hide the field depending on the value of other fields. The syntax to use here, for example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list-of-items:value1[OR]list-of-items:value2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;!--T:336--&amp;gt; list-of-items – It is the &#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039; of an already created field on which this field will depends to be show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;!--T:337--&amp;gt; value1 – Is the value need have the field on which it depends to be show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;!--T:338--&amp;gt; [OR] – To create a choice among multiple fields. In the example, this field will show when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field have the value: &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039; OR &#039;&#039;value2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;!--T:339--&amp;gt; [AND] – To combine multiple fields. This field will show only when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field have the value: &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039; AND &#039;&#039;value2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;!--T:340--&amp;gt; You can also use value &#039;does not equal&#039; as in &#039;&#039;&#039;list-of-items!:value1&#039;&#039;&#039;. The syntax will show this field only when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; is not equal to &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;!--T:341--&amp;gt; To show this field when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field has been selected and have not a empty value, use the syntax &#039;&#039;list-of-items!:&#039;&#039; (without a value specified).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:342--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Subform fields handle different the identifier &#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039; of &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039;. If you create a Subform custom field and you add this conditional field you are creating to there, you need use &#039;&#039;field[ID]&#039;&#039; instead of &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039;, where ID is the id of the field &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039;. Therefore, the showon attribute for this conditional field you are creating need be: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;field36:value1[OR]field36:value2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; where 36 is the ID of the field &#039;List of items&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Layout: (Default / Table / Form)&#039;&#039;&#039; Subform have this extra form option to select the layout for editing the fields.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:286--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:287--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:288--&amp;gt; The class of the field container in the output.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:289--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Value Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:303--&amp;gt; The class of the field value in the output.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:290--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:291--&amp;gt; Show the label when the field renders.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:292--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label Class (Output)&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:328--&amp;gt; CSS class to apply to the field label when it is displayed (displaying the output of a field).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:293--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Automatic Display&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:294--&amp;gt; Joomla offers some content events which are triggered during the content creation process. This is the place to define how the fields should be integrated into content. You can choose&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:295--&amp;gt; After Title&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:296--&amp;gt; Before Display Content&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:297--&amp;gt; After Display Content&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:298--&amp;gt; Do not automatically display&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:299--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Prefix&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:329--&amp;gt; Fixed text to be displayed before a field, for example &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;£&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:300--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Suffix&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:330--&amp;gt; Fixed text to be displayed after a field, for example &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;EUR&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:301--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Layout&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:331--&amp;gt; If there is a custom layout then it would be selected here.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:302--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display When Read-Only&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:332--&amp;gt; If the field is read only (perhaps the user doesn&#039;t have the access level) should the field be displayed or hidden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Publishing=== &amp;lt;!--T:99--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-publishing-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:100--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:304--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Created Date&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:305--&amp;gt; The current time when the field was created. Enter in a different date and time or click on the calendar icon to find the desired date.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:306--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Created By&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:307--&amp;gt; Name of the User who created this field. This will default to the currently logged-in user. If you want to change this to a different user, click the Select User button.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:308--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Modified Date&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:309--&amp;gt; Date of last modification.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:310--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Modified By&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:311--&amp;gt; Username who performed the last modification.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:312--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;ID&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:313--&amp;gt; A unique identification number for this field, you cannot change this number. When creating a new field, this field displays &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; until you save the new entry.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Permissions=== &amp;lt;!--T:106--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:112--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can enter permissions for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:314--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#hierarchylevels&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-permissions-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:113--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:114--&amp;gt; To change the permissions for this field, do the following.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:115--&amp;gt; Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group&#039;&#039;&#039; by clicking its title located on the left.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:116--&amp;gt; Find the desired &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:117--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can delete this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:118--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can edit this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:119--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit State&#039;&#039;&#039;. User can change the published state and related information for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:120--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Custom Field Value.&#039;&#039;&#039; Users can edit the field value.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:121--&amp;gt; Select the desired permission for the action you wish to change.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:131--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Inherited&#039;&#039;&#039;. Inherited for users in this Group from the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#permissions&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Global Configuration]], parent group, or category.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:315--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039;. Allowed for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:316--&amp;gt; Note: If this action is Denied at one of the higher levels, the Allowed permission here will not take effect. A Denied setting cannot be overridden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:317--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Denied&#039;&#039;&#039;. Denied for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:318--&amp;gt; Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; at top. When the screen refreshes, the Calculated Setting column will show the effective permission for this Group and Action.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar== &amp;lt;!--T:126--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:221--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;#screenshot&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Screenshot]] above.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:319--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and stays in the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:320--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and closes the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:321--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:322--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves your changes to a copy of the current field. Does not affect the current field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:323--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:324--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039;. Opens this help screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips== &amp;lt;!--T:138--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:139--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to know how to use fields: [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Adding_custom_fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Managing Custom Fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information== &amp;lt;!--T:140--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Fields/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:325--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2|Content Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk4x:Extensions_Plugin_Manager_Edit_FileSystem_Group&amp;diff=998617</id>
		<title>Chunk4x:Extensions Plugin Manager Edit FileSystem Group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk4x:Extensions_Plugin_Manager_Edit_FileSystem_Group&amp;diff=998617"/>
		<updated>2023-01-20T04:02:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==File System Group== &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===File System - Local=== &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Filesystem plugin to define one or multiple local directories to store your media files.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Help-4x-Extensions-Plugin-Edit-filesystem-local-options.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Directories.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select or add directories where images may be stored.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create Thumbnails.&#039;&#039;&#039; Image thumbnails are created in the Media Manager instead of show the original version. Those thumbnails are cached, increasing performance especially when a large amount of images is processed.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Chunk4x{{#translation:}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=File:Help-4x-Extensions-Plugin-Edit-filesystem-local-options.png&amp;diff=998616</id>
		<title>File:Help-4x-Extensions-Plugin-Edit-filesystem-local-options.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=File:Help-4x-Extensions-Plugin-Edit-filesystem-local-options.png&amp;diff=998616"/>
		<updated>2023-01-20T03:55:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Filesystem plugin to define one or multiple local directories to store your media files an the option to use thumbnails instead for the images inside media manager.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Users:_Edit_Profile&amp;diff=998615</id>
		<title>Help4.x:Users: Edit Profile</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Users:_Edit_Profile&amp;diff=998615"/>
		<updated>2023-01-20T03:38:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description== &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The User Edit screen is used to create a new user or edit an existing user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to access== &amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing user:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:71--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select {{rarr|Users,Manage}} from the Administrator menu. Then...&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
** Search for the required user and select the name link in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039; column.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new user:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select {{rarr|Users,Manage}} from the Administrator menu. Then...&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:72--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
** Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the Toolbar.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:73--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Or... Select {{rarr|Users,Manage,Plus icon}} from the Administrator menu.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:74--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Or... Select {{rarr|Users,Dashboard icon}} from the Administrator menu. Then...&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:75--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
** Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Plus&#039;&#039;&#039; icon from the Users panel.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:76--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Or... Select {{rarr|Home Dashboard,Site Panel,Users Plus icon}} starting from the Administrator menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot== &amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help-4x-users-user-manager-add-new-user-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|800px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Form Fields== &amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Account Details=== &amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter the name of the user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:35--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Name&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter the login name (Username) for the user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:36--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Password&#039;&#039;&#039;. Fill in a (new) password. Although this field is not required, the user will not be able to log in when no password is set.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:37--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Confirm Password&#039;&#039;&#039;. Fill in the password from the field above again, to verify it. This field is required when you filled in the New password field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:38--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Email&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter an email address for the user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:39--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Registration Date&#039;&#039;&#039;. Registration Date of the user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:40--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Last Visit Date&#039;&#039;&#039;. Date the user visited the site last time.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:41--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Last Reset Date&#039;&#039;&#039;. Date and time of last password reset.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:42--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Password Reset Count&#039;&#039;&#039;. Number of password resets since starting the last reset time.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:43--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;) If set to yes, the user will receive system emails.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:44--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;User Status&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Blocked&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Enabled&#039;&#039;) Enable or block this user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:45--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Require Password Reset&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;) If set to yes, the user will have to reset their password the next time they log into the site.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:46--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;ID&#039;&#039;&#039;. Record number in the database.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Assigned User Groups=== &amp;lt;!--T:47--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help-4x-users-user-manager-add-new-user-assigned-user-groups-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:48--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{anchor|basicsettings}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Basic Settings=== &amp;lt;!--T:49--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help-4x-users-user-manager-add-new-user-basic-settings-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:50--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:51--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Backend Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Use Default&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Hathor - Default&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;isis - Default&#039;&#039;) Select the template style for the Administrator Backend interface. This will only affect this User.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:52--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Backend Language&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Use Default&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;English (United Kingdom)&#039;&#039;) Select the Language for the Administrator Backend interface. This will only affect this User.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:53--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Frontend Language&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Use Default&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;English (United Kingdom)&#039;&#039;) Select the Language for the frontend interface. This will only affect this User.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:54--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Use Default&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Editor - CodeMirror&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Editor - None&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Editor - TinyMCE&#039;&#039;) Editor for this user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:55--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- *&#039;&#039;&#039;Help Site&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Use Default&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;English (GB) - Joomla help wiki&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Français (FR) - Aide de Joomla!&#039;&#039;) Help site for this user. --&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:56--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Time Zone&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Use Default&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Abidjan&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Accra&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Addis Ababa&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Algiers&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Asmara&#039;&#039;/...) Time zone for this user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Accessibility Settings === &amp;lt;!--T:57--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help-4x-users-user-manager-super-user-accessibility-settings-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:58--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:59--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Monochrome&#039;&#039;&#039;. Yes/No&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:60--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;High Contrast&#039;&#039;&#039;. Yes/No&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:61--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Highlight Links&#039;&#039;&#039;. Yes/No&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:62--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Increase Font Size&#039;&#039;&#039;. Yes/No&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== User Actions Log Options &#039;&#039;(tab available for Super Users only)&#039;&#039;=== &amp;lt;!--T:63--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help-4x-users-user-manager-super-user-actionslog-settings-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:64--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:65--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Send notifications for User Actions Log&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Yes/No&#039;&#039;) If set to yes, the User will receive user actions log notification by email&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:66--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Select events to be notified for&#039;&#039;&#039;. Select the user actions log notifications to be sent by email.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== W3C Web Authentication (WebAuthn) Login === &amp;lt;!--T:78--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:79--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is only present when the site is accessed using https. To set up passwordless login you need a hardware device, available from Amazon and similar outlets for about &amp;amp;pound;15, or a device with fingerprint or face recognition or similar biometric software. You may add more than one authenticator. Once set up, you can login by clicking the Web Authentication button in the Login form and then pressing the button on the device when prompted. &amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:80--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is present but cannot be used in the User edit form because passwordless login can only be set up by the individual user via the Edit Profile form.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Joomla API Token === &amp;lt;!--T:81--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:82--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is used to manage the security tokens used for authenticating to the Joomla API application (remote access to your site). If you are not sure what this does chances are you don&#039;t need it and can safely ignore these settings.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:83--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The token is only visible for your own account.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multi-factor Authentication === &amp;lt;!--T:84--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:85--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tab allows you to set one or more methods to allow access to your account after login with Username and Password. It is only present when editing your own profile. There are several methods available. If you lose access to one method for any reason you can choose another method from the post-login verification screen. The alternative mthods must have been set up in advance!&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Backup Codes ==== &amp;lt;!--T:86--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:87--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This method generates a set of numbers that you can save or print. Each number can be used only once, so remember to amend your list after use.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Verification code ==== &amp;lt;!--T:88--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:89--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An extra form to fill out with alternative methods of setting up the code. Have a look and click the Cancel button if you decide not to proceed.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Yubi Key ==== &amp;lt;!--T:90--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:91--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is for another type of hardware key that provides a code on a screen display. Have a look and select Cancel if you decide not to proceed.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Web Authentication ==== &amp;lt;!--T:92--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:93--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For a hardware device with a button to press. Have a look and select Cancel if you decide not to proceed. Note that this method will be bypassed if you use the separate WebAuthn Login method.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Code by Email ==== &amp;lt;!--T:94--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:95--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With this method a code is sent to your email address. You will be prompted to enter that code to gain site access. It is a one-time code. A new one is sent for every login. Have a look and select Cancel if you decide not to proceed.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Toolbar== &amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:77--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Save/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;|user}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndClose/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;|user}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndNew/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;|user}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Cancel/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:67--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}} &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:68--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Or&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Close/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:69--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;Activate &amp;amp; Send Email.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;Activate the user and send an email notifying that their account has been activated. -OR-&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;Send Activation Reminder.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;An email will be sent to the user notifying that their account has been activated&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:70--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick tips== &amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Name, Login Name, and Email are required.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*If you did not fill in a particular language, editor, help site and/or time zone, the default settings from the Global Configuration, Language Manager and/or Template Manager are set.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related information== &amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help4.x:Users/en|Users]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help4.x:Users:_Groups/en|Users: Groups]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial/en|ACL Tutorial for Joomla! 3.x]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2|User Manager Help Screens}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Users:_Edit_Profile&amp;diff=998614</id>
		<title>Help4.x:Users: Edit Profile</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Users:_Edit_Profile&amp;diff=998614"/>
		<updated>2023-01-20T03:37:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description== &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The User Edit screen is used to create a new user or edit an existing user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to access== &amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing user:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:71--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select {{rarr|Users,Manage}} from the Administrator menu. Then...&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
** Search for the required user and select the name link in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039; column.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new user:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select {{rarr|Users,Manage}} from the Administrator menu. Then...&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:72--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
** Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the Toolbar.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:73--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Or... Select {{rarr|Users,Manage,Plus icon}} from the Administrator menu.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:74--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Or... Select {{rarr|Users,Dashboard icon}} from the Administrator menu. Then...&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:75--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
** Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Plus&#039;&#039;&#039; icon from the Users panel.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:76--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Or... Select {{rarr|Home Dashboard,Site Panel,Users Plus icon}} starting from the Administrator menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot== &amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help-4x-users-user-manager-add-new-user-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|800px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Form Fields== &amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Account Details=== &amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter the name of the user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:35--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Name&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter the login name (Username) for the user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:36--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Password&#039;&#039;&#039;. Fill in a (new) password. Although this field is not required, the user will not be able to log in when no password is set.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:37--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Confirm Password&#039;&#039;&#039;. Fill in the password from the field above again, to verify it. This field is required when you filled in the New password field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:38--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Email&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter an email address for the user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:39--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Registration Date&#039;&#039;&#039;. Registration Date of the user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:40--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Last Visit Date&#039;&#039;&#039;. Date the user visited the site last time.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:41--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Last Reset Date&#039;&#039;&#039;. Date and time of last password reset.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:42--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Password Reset Count&#039;&#039;&#039;. Number of password resets since starting the last reset time.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:43--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;) If set to yes, the user will receive system emails.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:44--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;User Status&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Blocked&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Enabled&#039;&#039;) Enable or block this user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:45--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Require Password Reset&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;) If set to yes, the user will have to reset their password the next time they log into the site.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:46--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;ID&#039;&#039;&#039;. Record number in the database.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Assigned User Groups=== &amp;lt;!--T:47--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help-4x-users-user-manager-add-new-user-assigned-user-groups-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:48--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{anchor|basicsettings}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Basic Settings=== &amp;lt;!--T:49--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help-4x-users-user-manager-add-new-user-basic-settings-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:50--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:51--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Backend Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Use Default&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Hathor - Default&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;isis - Default&#039;&#039;) Select the template style for the Administrator Backend interface. This will only affect this User.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:52--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Backend Language&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Use Default&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;English (United Kingdom)&#039;&#039;) Select the Language for the Administrator Backend interface. This will only affect this User.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:53--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Frontend Language&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Use Default&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;English (United Kingdom)&#039;&#039;) Select the Language for the frontend interface. This will only affect this User.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:54--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Use Default&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Editor - CodeMirror&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Editor - None&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Editor - TinyMCE&#039;&#039;) Editor for this user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:55--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- *&#039;&#039;&#039;Help Site&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Use Default&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;English (GB) - Joomla help wiki&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Français (FR) - Aide de Joomla!&#039;&#039;) Help site for this user. --&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:56--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Time Zone&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Use Default&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Abidjan&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Accra&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Addis Ababa&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Algiers&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Asmara&#039;&#039;/...) Time zone for this user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Accessibility Settings === &amp;lt;!--T:57--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help-4x-users-user-manager-super-user-accessibility-settings-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:58--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:59--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Monochrome&#039;&#039;&#039;. Yes/No&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:60--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;High Contrast&#039;&#039;&#039;. Yes/No&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:61--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Highlight Links&#039;&#039;&#039;. Yes/No&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:62--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Increase Font Size&#039;&#039;&#039;. Yes/No&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== User Actions Log Options &#039;&#039;(tab available for Super Users only)&#039;&#039;=== &amp;lt;!--T:63--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help-4x-users-user-manager-super-user-actionslog-settings-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:64--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:65--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Send notifications for User Actions Log&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Yes/No&#039;&#039;) If set to yes, the User will receive user actions log notification by email&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:66--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Select events to be notified for&#039;&#039;&#039;. Select the user actions log notifications to be sent by email.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== W3C Web Authentication (WebAuthn) Login === &amp;lt;!--T:78--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:79--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is only present when the site is accessed using https. To set up passwordless login you need a hardware device, available from Amazon and similar outlets for about &amp;amp;pound;15, or a device with fingerprint or face recognition or similar biometric software. You may add more than one authenticator. Once set up, you can login by clicking the Web Authentication button in the Login form and then pressing the button on the device when prompted. &amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:80--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is present but cannot be used in the User edit form because passwordless login can only be set up by the individual user via the Edit Profile form.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Joomla API Token === &amp;lt;!--T:81--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:82--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is used to manage the security tokens used for authenticating to the Joomla API application (remote access to your site). If you are not sure what this does chances are you don&#039;t need it and can safely ignore these settings.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:83--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The token is only visible for your own account.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multi-factor Authentication === &amp;lt;!--T:84--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:85--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tab allows you to set one or more methods to allow access to your account after login with Username and Password. It is only present when editing your own profile. There are several methods available. If you lose access to one method for any reason you can choose another method from the post-login verification screen. The alternative mthods must have been set up in advance!&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Backup Codes ==== &amp;lt;!--T:86--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:87--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This method generates a set of numbers that you can save or print. Each number can be used only once, so remember to amend your list after use.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Verification code ==== &amp;lt;!--T:88--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:89--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An extra form to fill out with alternative methods of setting up the code. Have a look and click the Cancel button if you decide not to proceed.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Yubi Key ==== &amp;lt;!--T:90--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:91--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is for another type of hardware key that provides a code on a screen display. Have a look and select Cancel if you decide not to proceed.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Web Authentication ==== &amp;lt;!--T:92--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:93--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For a hardware device with a button to press. Have a look and select Cancel if you decide not to proceed. Note that this method will be bypassed if you use the separate WebAuthn Login method.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Code by Email ==== &amp;lt;!--T:94--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:95--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With this method a code is sent to your email address. You will be prompted to enter that code to gain site access. It is a one-time code. A new one is sent for every login. Have a look and select Cancel if you decide not to proceed.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Toolbar== &amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:77--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Save/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;|user}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndClose/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;|user}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndNew/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;|user}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Cancel/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:67--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}} &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:68--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Or&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Close/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:69--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;Activate &amp;amp; Send Email.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;Activate the user and send an email notifying that their account has been activated.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OR&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;Send Activation Reminder.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;An email will be sent to the user notifying that their account has been activated&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:70--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick tips== &amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Name, Login Name, and Email are required.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*If you did not fill in a particular language, editor, help site and/or time zone, the default settings from the Global Configuration, Language Manager and/or Template Manager are set.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related information== &amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help4.x:Users/en|Users]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help4.x:Users:_Groups/en|Users: Groups]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial/en|ACL Tutorial for Joomla! 3.x]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2|User Manager Help Screens}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Users:_Edit_Profile&amp;diff=998613</id>
		<title>Help4.x:Users: Edit Profile</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Users:_Edit_Profile&amp;diff=998613"/>
		<updated>2023-01-20T03:33:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description== &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The User Edit screen is used to create a new user or edit an existing user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to access== &amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing user:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:71--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select {{rarr|Users,Manage}} from the Administrator menu. Then...&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
** Search for the required user and select the name link in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039; column.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new user:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select {{rarr|Users,Manage}} from the Administrator menu. Then...&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:72--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
** Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the Toolbar.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:73--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Or... Select {{rarr|Users,Manage,Plus icon}} from the Administrator menu.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:74--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Or... Select {{rarr|Users,Dashboard icon}} from the Administrator menu. Then...&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:75--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
** Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Plus&#039;&#039;&#039; icon from the Users panel.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:76--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Or... Select {{rarr|Home Dashboard,Site Panel,Users Plus icon}} starting from the Administrator menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot== &amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help-4x-users-user-manager-add-new-user-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|800px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Form Fields== &amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Account Details=== &amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter the name of the user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:35--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Name&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter the login name (Username) for the user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:36--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Password&#039;&#039;&#039;. Fill in a (new) password. Although this field is not required, the user will not be able to log in when no password is set.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:37--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Confirm Password&#039;&#039;&#039;. Fill in the password from the field above again, to verify it. This field is required when you filled in the New password field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:38--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Email&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter an email address for the user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:39--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Registration Date&#039;&#039;&#039;. Registration Date of the user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:40--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Last Visit Date&#039;&#039;&#039;. Date the user visited the site last time.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:41--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Last Reset Date&#039;&#039;&#039;. Date and time of last password reset.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:42--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Password Reset Count&#039;&#039;&#039;. Number of password resets since starting the last reset time.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:43--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Receive System Emails&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;) If set to yes, the user will receive system emails.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:44--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;User Status&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Blocked&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Enabled&#039;&#039;) Enable or block this user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:45--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Require Password Reset&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;) If set to yes, the user will have to reset their password the next time they log into the site.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:46--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;ID&#039;&#039;&#039;. Record number in the database.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Assigned User Groups=== &amp;lt;!--T:47--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help-4x-users-user-manager-add-new-user-assigned-user-groups-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:48--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{anchor|basicsettings}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Basic Settings=== &amp;lt;!--T:49--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help-4x-users-user-manager-add-new-user-basic-settings-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:50--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:51--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Backend Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Use Default&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Hathor - Default&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;isis - Default&#039;&#039;) Select the template style for the Administrator Backend interface. This will only affect this User.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:52--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Backend Language&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Use Default&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;English (United Kingdom)&#039;&#039;) Select the Language for the Administrator Backend interface. This will only affect this User.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:53--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Frontend Language&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Use Default&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;English (United Kingdom)&#039;&#039;) Select the Language for the frontend interface. This will only affect this User.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:54--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Use Default&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Editor - CodeMirror&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Editor - None&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Editor - TinyMCE&#039;&#039;) Editor for this user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:55--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- *&#039;&#039;&#039;Help Site&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Use Default&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;English (GB) - Joomla help wiki&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Français (FR) - Aide de Joomla!&#039;&#039;) Help site for this user. --&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:56--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Time Zone&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Use Default&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Abidjan&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Accra&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Addis Ababa&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Algiers&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Asmara&#039;&#039;/...) Time zone for this user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Accessibility Settings === &amp;lt;!--T:57--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help-4x-users-user-manager-super-user-accessibility-settings-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:58--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:59--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Monochrome&#039;&#039;&#039;. Yes/No&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:60--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;High Contrast&#039;&#039;&#039;. Yes/No&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:61--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Highlight Links&#039;&#039;&#039;. Yes/No&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:62--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Increase Font Size&#039;&#039;&#039;. Yes/No&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== User Actions Log Options &#039;&#039;(tab available for Super Users only)&#039;&#039;=== &amp;lt;!--T:63--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:help-4x-users-user-manager-super-user-actionslog-settings-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:64--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:65--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Send notifications for User Actions Log&#039;&#039;&#039;. (&#039;&#039;Yes/No&#039;&#039;) If set to yes, the User will receive user actions log notification by email&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:66--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Select events to be notified for&#039;&#039;&#039;. Select the user actions log notifications to be sent by email.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== W3C Web Authentication (WebAuthn) Login === &amp;lt;!--T:78--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:79--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is only present when the site is accessed using https. To set up passwordless login you need a hardware device, available from Amazon and similar outlets for about &amp;amp;pound;15, or a device with fingerprint or face recognition or similar biometric software. You may add more than one authenticator. Once set up, you can login by clicking the Web Authentication button in the Login form and then pressing the button on the device when prompted. &amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:80--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is present but cannot be used in the User edit form because passwordless login can only be set up by the individual user via the Edit Profile form.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Joomla API Token === &amp;lt;!--T:81--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:82--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is used to manage the security tokens used for authenticating to the Joomla API application (remote access to your site). If you are not sure what this does chances are you don&#039;t need it and can safely ignore these settings.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:83--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The token is only visible for your own account.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multi-factor Authentication === &amp;lt;!--T:84--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:85--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tab allows you to set one or more methods to allow access to your account after login with Username and Password. It is only present when editing your own profile. There are several methods available. If you lose access to one method for any reason you can choose another method from the post-login verification screen. The alternative mthods must have been set up in advance!&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Backup Codes ==== &amp;lt;!--T:86--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:87--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This method generates a set of numbers that you can save or print. Each number can be used only once, so remember to amend your list after use.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Verification code ==== &amp;lt;!--T:88--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:89--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An extra form to fill out with alternative methods of setting up the code. Have a look and click the Cancel button if you decide not to proceed.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Yubi Key ==== &amp;lt;!--T:90--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:91--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is for another type of hardware key that provides a code on a screen display. Have a look and select Cancel if you decide not to proceed.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Web Authentication ==== &amp;lt;!--T:92--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:93--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For a hardware device with a button to press. Have a look and select Cancel if you decide not to proceed. Note that this method will be bypassed if you use the separate WebAuthn Login method.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Code by Email ==== &amp;lt;!--T:94--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:95--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With this method a code is sent to your email address. You will be prompted to enter that code to gain site access. It is a one-time code. A new one is sent for every login. Have a look and select Cancel if you decide not to proceed.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Toolbar== &amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:77--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Save/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;|user}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndClose/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;|user}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndNew/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;|user}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Cancel/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:67--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}} &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:68--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Or&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Close/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:69--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;Activate &amp;amp; Send Email.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;Activate the user and send an email notifying that their account has been activated.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:70--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick tips== &amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Name, Login Name, and Email are required.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*If you did not fill in a particular language, editor, help site and/or time zone, the default settings from the Global Configuration, Language Manager and/or Template Manager are set.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related information== &amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help4.x:Users/en|Users]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help4.x:Users:_Groups/en|Users: Groups]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial/en|ACL Tutorial for Joomla! 3.x]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2|User Manager Help Screens}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Users&amp;diff=998612</id>
		<title>Help4.x:Users</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Users&amp;diff=998612"/>
		<updated>2023-01-20T03:25:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Description== &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Users list is used to find, add, and edit users.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to access== &amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;rarr&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Home Dashboard,Site,Users}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:109--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To add a User:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:110--&amp;gt; click the &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039; toolbar button&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:111--&amp;gt; To edit a User:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:112--&amp;gt; select a &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039; from the list&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{anchor|screenshot}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot== &amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Users-screen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|800px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers== &amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:113--&amp;gt; Checkbox&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:114--&amp;gt; Check this box to select users. To select all users, check the box in the column heading. After boxes are checked the toolbar button &#039;Actions&#039; get active.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt; Name&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:115--&amp;gt; The full name of the user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:53--&amp;gt; Add a Note&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:116--&amp;gt; Create a Note for the user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
***&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:117--&amp;gt; Show notes list&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:118--&amp;gt; Show the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;S:MyLanguage/Help4.x:User_Notes{{#translation:}}&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|User Notes]] for the user as a list.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
***&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:54--&amp;gt; Display note&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:119--&amp;gt; Show the User Notes for the user in a window and stays in the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt; Username&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:120--&amp;gt; The name the user will log in as.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt; Enabled&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:121--&amp;gt; Whether or not the user is enabled.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt; Activated&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:122--&amp;gt; Whether or not the user is activated. Normally when a user registers from the Frontend, some type of activation is required. This is controlled by the &#039;New User Account Activation&#039; parameter in the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;S:MyLanguage/Help4.x:Users:_Options{{#translation:}}#newuseraccountactivation&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Users: Options]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt; User Groups&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:123--&amp;gt; The list of groups that the user belongs to. Note that a user may belong to more than one group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:124--&amp;gt; Email&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:125--&amp;gt; The email address from the user is displayed here.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:126--&amp;gt; Last visit&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:127--&amp;gt; Here you can see the date on which the user last logged in.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt; Registered&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:128--&amp;gt; The date the user was registered.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:95--&amp;gt; ID&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:129--&amp;gt; A unique identification number for this user, you cannot change this number.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==List Filters== &amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:104--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Search bar&#039;&#039;&#039;. Near the top of the page you will see the search bar shown in the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;#screenshot&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Screenshot]] above.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:250--&amp;gt; Search by Text&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:251--&amp;gt; Enter part of the search term and click the Search icon. &#039;&#039;Hover&#039;&#039; to see a &#039;&#039;Tooltip&#039;&#039; indicating which fields will be searched.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:252--&amp;gt; To &#039;Search by ID&#039; enter &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;&amp;quot;id:x&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;, where &amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;&amp;quot;x&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; is the ID number (for example, &amp;lt;tvar name=3&amp;gt;&amp;quot;id:19&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:253--&amp;gt; Filter Options&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:254--&amp;gt; Click to display the additional filters.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:249--&amp;gt; Clear&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:270--&amp;gt; Click to clear the Filter field and restore the list to its unfiltered state.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:255--&amp;gt; Ordering&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:256--&amp;gt; Shows the current list ordering field. 2 ways to change the order:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:257--&amp;gt; Select from the dropdown list. Ordering may be in ascending or descending order.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:258--&amp;gt; Click a column heading. The column heading toggles between ascending and descending order.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:259--&amp;gt; Number to Display&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:260--&amp;gt; Shows the number of users in a list. Select from the dropdown list to change the number displayed.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:261--&amp;gt; The default for a site is &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;&#039;20&#039;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; but this may be changed in the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;S:MyLanguage/Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration{{#translation:}}#defaultlistlimit&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Global Configuration]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Filter Options=== &amp;lt;!--T:262--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:263--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Near the top of the page you will see the filter bar shown in the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;#screenshot&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Screenshot]] above.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:264--&amp;gt; Select State&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:265--&amp;gt; Select from Enabled / Disabled.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:42--&amp;gt; Select Active State&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:266--&amp;gt; Select from Activated / Unactivated.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:43--&amp;gt; Select Group&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:267--&amp;gt; Select from the list box to list only users who are members of that group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:52--&amp;gt; Select Last Vist Date&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:268--&amp;gt; Select from a list to show only users who visited in a selected time frame. &amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:44--&amp;gt; Select Registration Date&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:269--&amp;gt; Select from a list to show only users who registered in a selected time frame.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pagination=== &amp;lt;!--T:271--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:272--&amp;gt; Page Controls&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:273--&amp;gt; When the number of articles is more than one page, you will see a page control bar near the bottom of the page shown in the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;#screenshot&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Screenshot]] above. The current page number being viewed has a dark colour background.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:274--&amp;gt; Start&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:275--&amp;gt; Click to go to the first page.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:276--&amp;gt; Prev&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:277--&amp;gt; Click to go to the previous page.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:278--&amp;gt; Page numbers&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:279--&amp;gt; Click to go to the desired page.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:280--&amp;gt; Next&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:281--&amp;gt; Click to go to the next page.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:282--&amp;gt; End&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:283--&amp;gt; Click to go to the last page.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar== &amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:130--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;#screenshot&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Screenshot]] above.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:131--&amp;gt; New&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:132--&amp;gt; Opens the editing screen to create a new user.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:133--&amp;gt; Actions&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:134--&amp;gt; Reveals a list of actions for selected users. Check one or more users checkboxes to activate the list.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:135--&amp;gt; Activate&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:136--&amp;gt; Activates multiple users. Select all the users required using their checkboxes then click this button.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;An email will be sent to the user notifying that their account has been activated&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:137--&amp;gt; Block&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:138--&amp;gt; Blocks one or more users. Select the users to be blocked using their checkboxes then click this button.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:139--&amp;gt; Unblock&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:140--&amp;gt; Unblocks one or more users. Select the users to be unblocked using their checkboxes then click this button.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:141--&amp;gt; Batch&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:148--&amp;gt; Batch processes the selected users.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:142--&amp;gt; Delete&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:143--&amp;gt; Deletes the selected users.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:144--&amp;gt; Options&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:145--&amp;gt; Opens [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;S:MyLanguage/Help4.x:Users:_Options{{#translation:}}&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Users: Options]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:146--&amp;gt; Help&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:147--&amp;gt; Opens this help screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Batch Process== &amp;lt;!--T:55--&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:57--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Batch Process allows a change in settings for a group of selected users.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Users-batch-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:58--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:59--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;How to Batch Process&#039;&#039;&#039; a group of users:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:60--&amp;gt; Select one or more users on the list by checking the desired checkboxes.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:284--&amp;gt; Click the Batch Toolbar button.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:61--&amp;gt; Set one or more of the following values:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:62--&amp;gt; To change the &#039;&#039;&#039;User Group&#039;&#039;&#039;, select the desired new user group from the Select Group list box.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:63--&amp;gt; Choose to do the desired action.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:285--&amp;gt; Add To Group&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:286--&amp;gt; Delete From Group&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:287--&amp;gt; Move To Group&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:64--&amp;gt; Decide if a &#039;&#039;&#039;Password Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; is wanted.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:65--&amp;gt; When all of the settings are entered, click on Process to perform the changes. A message &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Batch process completed successfully.&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; will show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips== &amp;lt;!--T:45--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:46--&amp;gt; Click on the name of a user to edit the user&#039;s properties.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:47--&amp;gt; Click on the icon in the Enabled column to toggle between Enabled and Disabled status.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:49--&amp;gt; To understand user and group permissions, read: [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;S:MyLanguage/J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial{{#translation:}}&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Access Control List]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; {{JVer|3.x|Joomla 3.x|long}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related information== &amp;lt;!--T:50--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:288--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;S:MyLanguage/Help4.x:Home_Dashboard{{#translation:}}&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Home Dashboard]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;: &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:289--&amp;gt; Access to many default Joomla functions.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Users/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2|User Manager Help Screens}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Media:_Options&amp;diff=997791</id>
		<title>Help4.x:Media: Options</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Media:_Options&amp;diff=997791"/>
		<updated>2023-01-12T00:45:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description== &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Media Options configuration allows setting of parameters used globally for Media. Control the file types allowed for uploading, MIME type check, MIME type blacklisting, and more options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access== &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;rarr&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Content,Media}}&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt; click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; toolbar button&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{anchor|screenshot}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot== &amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Media-Options-screen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|800px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Form Fields== &amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Media=== &amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:180--&amp;gt; Maximum Size (in MB)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:181--&amp;gt; Use zero for no limit. Note: The server has a maximum limit.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:182--&amp;gt; Path to Files Folder&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:183--&amp;gt; Enter the path to the files folder relative to the root of your webspace.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:184--&amp;gt; Changing to another path than the default &#039;images&#039; may break your links.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:185--&amp;gt; Do not start the path with a slash.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:186--&amp;gt; Path to Images Folder&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;!--T:187--&amp;gt; Enter the path to the images folder relative to the root of your webspace.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:188--&amp;gt; This path has to be the same as path to files (default) or to a subfolder of the path to file folder.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:189--&amp;gt; Do not start the path with a slash.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:190--&amp;gt; Restrict Uploads&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:191--&amp;gt; Restrict uploads for lower than manager users to images if &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;&#039;Fileinfo&#039;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;&#039;MIME Magic&#039;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; isn&#039;t installed.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:192--&amp;gt; Allowed Extensions&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:193--&amp;gt; Restrict uploads for lower than manager users to files in the list.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:194--&amp;gt; Check MIME Types&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:195--&amp;gt; Use &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;&#039;Fileinfo&#039;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;&#039;MIME Magic&#039;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; to attempt to verify files. Try disabling this if you get invalid mime type errors.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; Legal Image Extensions (File Types)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:201--&amp;gt; Image extensions (file types) you are allowed to upload (comma separated). These are used to check for valid image headers and to select images with the [[Media form field type|Media form field]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; Legal Audio Extensions (File Types)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:203--&amp;gt; Audio extensions (file types) you are allowed to upload (comma separated). These are used to check for valid audio headers and to select audio files with the [[Media form field type|Media form field]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; Legal Video Extensions (File Types)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:205--&amp;gt; Video extensions (file types) you are allowed to upload (comma separated). These are used to check for valid video headers and to select videos with the [[Media form field type|Media form field]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; Legal Document Extensions (File Types)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:207--&amp;gt; Document extensions (file types) you are allowed to upload (comma separated). These are used to check for valid document headers and to select documents with the [[Media form field type|Media form field]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:208--&amp;gt; Ignored Extensions&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:209--&amp;gt; Ignored file extensions for MIME type checking and restricted uploads.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:196--&amp;gt; Legal MIME Types&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:197--&amp;gt; A comma separated list of legal MIME types to upload.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Permissions=== &amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:210--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This section lets you set up the default [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Access_Control_List&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Access Control List]] permissions for all media.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Media-Options-permissions-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:211--&amp;gt; To change the permissions for media, do the following.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:212--&amp;gt; Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group&#039;&#039;&#039; by clicking its title located on the left.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:213--&amp;gt; Find the desired &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:214--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Configure ACL &amp;amp; Options&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can edit the options and permissions.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:215--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Configure Options Only&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can edit the options exept the permissions.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:216--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Administration Interface&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can access user administration interface.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:217--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Create&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can create media.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:218--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can delete media.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:219--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can edit media.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:220--&amp;gt; Select the desired permission for the action you wish to change.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:221--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Inherited&#039;&#039;&#039;. Inherited for users in this Group from the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#permissions&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Global Configuration]] permissions.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:222--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039;. Allowed for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;!--T:223--&amp;gt; Note: If this action is Denied at one of the higher levels, the Allowed permission here will not take effect. A Denied setting cannot be overridden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:224--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Denied&#039;&#039;&#039;. Denied for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:225--&amp;gt; Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; at top. When the screen refreshes, the Calculated Setting column will show the effective permission for this Group and Action.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar== &amp;lt;!--T:39--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:226--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;#screenshot&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Screenshot]] above.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:227--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the Media options and stays in the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:228--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the Media options and closes the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:229--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:230--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Toggle Inline Help&#039;&#039;&#039;. Show help text below some options.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:231--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039;. Opens this help screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips== &amp;lt;!--T:45--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:178--&amp;gt; If you are a beginning user, you can just keep the default values here until you learn more about using global options.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:179--&amp;gt; If you are an advanced user, you can save time by creating good default values here.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information== &amp;lt;!--T:47--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:48--&amp;gt; Related Help screen: [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Media&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Media]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:232--&amp;gt; Tutorial: [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J4.x:Managing_Media&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Managing Media]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{Cathelp|4.0|Media Manager Help Screens|Content Help Screens}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Media:_Options&amp;diff=997788</id>
		<title>Help4.x:Media: Options</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Media:_Options&amp;diff=997788"/>
		<updated>2023-01-11T20:27:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description== &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Media Options configuration allows setting of parameters used globally for Media. Control the file types allowed for uploading, MIME type check, MIME type blacklisting, and more options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access== &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;rarr&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Content,Media}}&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt; click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; toolbar button&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{anchor|screenshot}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot== &amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Media-Options-screen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|800px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Form Fields== &amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Media=== &amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:180--&amp;gt; Maximum Size (in MB)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:181--&amp;gt; Use zero for no limit. Note: The server has a maximum limit.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:182--&amp;gt; Path to Files Folder&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:183--&amp;gt; Enter the path to the files folder relative to the root of your webspace.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:184--&amp;gt; Changing to another path than the default &#039;images&#039; may break your links.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:185--&amp;gt; Do not start the path with a slash.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:186--&amp;gt; Path to Images Folder&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;!--T:187--&amp;gt; Enter the path to the images folder relative to the root of your webspace.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:188--&amp;gt; This path has to be the same as path to files (default) or to a subfolder of the path to file folder.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:189--&amp;gt; Do not start the path with a slash.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:190--&amp;gt; Restrict Uploads&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:191--&amp;gt; Restrict uploads for lower than manager users to images if &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;&#039;Fileinfo&#039;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;&#039;MIME Magic&#039;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; isn&#039;t installed.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:192--&amp;gt; Allowed Extensions&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:193--&amp;gt; Restrict uploads for lower than manager users to files in the list.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:194--&amp;gt; Check MIME Types&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:195--&amp;gt; Use &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;&#039;Fileinfo&#039;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;&#039;MIME Magic&#039;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; to attempt to verify files. Try disabling this if you get invalid mime type errors.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:196--&amp;gt; Legal MIME Types&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:197--&amp;gt; A comma separated list of legal MIME types to upload.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; Legal Image Extensions (File Types)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:201--&amp;gt; Image extensions (file types) you are allowed to upload (comma separated). These are used to check for valid image headers and to select images with the [[Media form field type|Media form field]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; Legal Audio Extensions (File Types)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:203--&amp;gt; Audio extensions (file types) you are allowed to upload (comma separated). These are used to check for valid audio headers and to select audio files with the [[Media form field type|Media form field]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; Legal Video Extensions (File Types)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:205--&amp;gt; Video extensions (file types) you are allowed to upload (comma separated). These are used to check for valid video headers and to select videos with the [[Media form field type|Media form field]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; Legal Document Extensions (File Types)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:207--&amp;gt; Document extensions (file types) you are allowed to upload (comma separated). These are used to check for valid document headers and to select documents with the [[Media form field type|Media form field]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:208--&amp;gt; Ignored Extensions&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:209--&amp;gt; Ignored file extensions for MIME type checking and restricted uploads.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Permissions=== &amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:210--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This section lets you set up the default [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Access_Control_List&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Access Control List]] permissions for all media.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Media-Options-permissions-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:211--&amp;gt; To change the permissions for media, do the following.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:212--&amp;gt; Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group&#039;&#039;&#039; by clicking its title located on the left.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:213--&amp;gt; Find the desired &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:214--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Configure ACL &amp;amp; Options&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can edit the options and permissions.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:215--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Configure Options Only&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can edit the options exept the permissions.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:216--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Administration Interface&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can access user administration interface.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:217--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Create&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can create media.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:218--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can delete media.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:219--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can edit media.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:220--&amp;gt; Select the desired permission for the action you wish to change.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:221--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Inherited&#039;&#039;&#039;. Inherited for users in this Group from the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#permissions&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Global Configuration]] permissions.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:222--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039;. Allowed for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;!--T:223--&amp;gt; Note: If this action is Denied at one of the higher levels, the Allowed permission here will not take effect. A Denied setting cannot be overridden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:224--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Denied&#039;&#039;&#039;. Denied for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:225--&amp;gt; Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; at top. When the screen refreshes, the Calculated Setting column will show the effective permission for this Group and Action.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar== &amp;lt;!--T:39--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:226--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;#screenshot&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Screenshot]] above.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:227--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the Media options and stays in the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:228--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the Media options and closes the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:229--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:230--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Toggle Inline Help&#039;&#039;&#039;. Show help text below some options.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:231--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039;. Opens this help screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips== &amp;lt;!--T:45--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:178--&amp;gt; If you are a beginning user, you can just keep the default values here until you learn more about using global options.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:179--&amp;gt; If you are an advanced user, you can save time by creating good default values here.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information== &amp;lt;!--T:47--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:48--&amp;gt; Related Help screen: [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Media&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Media]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:232--&amp;gt; Tutorial: [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J4.x:Managing_Media&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Managing Media]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{Cathelp|4.0|Media Manager Help Screens|Content Help Screens}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Menus:_Items&amp;diff=997787</id>
		<title>Help4.x:Menus: Items</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Menus:_Items&amp;diff=997787"/>
		<updated>2023-01-11T20:22:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description== &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Menus: Items page lists the menu items contained in a menu created using the [[Help4.x:Menus/en|Menu Manager]]. The Title bar shows the name of the selected menu or &#039;&#039;All Menu Items&#039;&#039; if that list is selected.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to access== &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select {{rarr|Menus,All Menu Items}} from the Administrator menu. Or...&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:79--&amp;gt; * Select {{rarr|Menus,[&#039;&#039;Menu Name&#039;&#039;]}} from the Administrator menu to select items for a specific menu.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot== &amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Help-4x-menus-menu-manager-menu-items-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers== &amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Checkbox/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:66--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Status/en}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Title/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:67--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Menu/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:68--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Home/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:69--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Access/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:70--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Association/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:71--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Language/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:72--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Id/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:73--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==List Filters== &amp;lt;!--T:39--&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_filter_bar_top_descriptor/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:78--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:62--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Site/Administrator&#039;&#039;&#039;. The client where the menu is used.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:41--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Menu&#039;&#039;&#039;. A field to select the menu you want to search.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:54--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Search&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter part of the menu&#039;s name and press the Search to find matching names. Press &#039;&#039;&#039;x&#039;&#039;&#039; or Clear to clear the search field and restore the list of menus.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Order/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:80--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;Filter Options:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Status/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:81--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Access/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:82--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Language/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:83--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Max Levels/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:84--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;Select Component.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;Select from the list of components used by the menu items&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:63--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Parent Menu Item&#039;&#039;&#039;. Lets you show only items of a menu item.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:64--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;- Select Parent Menu Item -:&#039;&#039;&#039; Show all menu items.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:65--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;your menu item&amp;gt;:&#039;&#039;&#039; Show items only for this menu item.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar== &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:74--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_New/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;|menu item}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Actions/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;|menu item}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Publish/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;|menu items}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Unpublish/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;|menu items}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Checkin/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;|menu items}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Trash/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;|menu items}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Batch/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:38--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;|menu items}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Rebuild/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:75--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Options/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:76--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:77--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Batch Process== &amp;lt;!--T:52--&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Batch Process/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:85--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips== &amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Select an item and click on the &#039;&#039;Home&#039;&#039; button to set your Home page.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Set different filter options to only show some of the menu items.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related information== &amp;lt;!--T:35--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:36--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help4.x:Menus/en|Menu Manager]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2|Menu Manager Help Screens|Menus Help Screens|Help screens}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Media:_Options&amp;diff=997784</id>
		<title>Help4.x:Media: Options</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Media:_Options&amp;diff=997784"/>
		<updated>2023-01-11T18:51:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description== &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Media Options configuration allows setting of parameters used globally for Media. Control the file types allowed for uploading, MIME type check, MIME type blacklisting, and more options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access== &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;rarr&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Content,Media}}&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt; click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; toolbar button&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{anchor|screenshot}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot== &amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Media-Options-screen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|800px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Form Fields== &amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Media=== &amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:180--&amp;gt; Maximum Size (in MB)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:181--&amp;gt; Use zero for no limit. Note: The server has a maximum limit.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:182--&amp;gt; Path to Files Folder&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:183--&amp;gt; Enter the path to the files folder relative to the root of your webspace.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:184--&amp;gt; Changing to another path than the default &#039;images&#039; may break your links.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:185--&amp;gt; Do not start the path with a slash.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:186--&amp;gt; Path to Images Folder&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;!--T:187--&amp;gt; Enter the path to the images folder relative to the root of your webspace.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:188--&amp;gt; This path has to be the same as path to files (default) or to a subfolder of the path to file folder.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:189--&amp;gt; Do not start the path with a slash.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:190--&amp;gt; Restrict Uploads&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:191--&amp;gt; Restrict uploads for lower than manager users to images if &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;&#039;Fileinfo&#039;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;&#039;MIME Magic&#039;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; isn&#039;t installed.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:192--&amp;gt; Allowed Extensions&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:193--&amp;gt; Restrict uploads for lower than manager users to files in the list.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:194--&amp;gt; Check MIME Types&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:195--&amp;gt; Use &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;&#039;Fileinfo&#039;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;&#039;MIME Magic&#039;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; to attempt to verify files. Try disabling this if you get invalid mime type errors.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:196--&amp;gt; Legal MIME Types&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:197--&amp;gt; A comma separated list of legal MIME types to upload.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:198--&amp;gt; Forbidden MIME Types&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:199--&amp;gt; A comma separated list of forbidden MIME types to upload. &#039;&#039;&#039;Be aware: This field didn&#039;t have any influence on uploads since Joomla 3.7.1. Therefore it has been removed in Joomla 4.3.0.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; Legal Image Extensions (File Types)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:201--&amp;gt; Image extensions (file types) you are allowed to upload (comma separated). These are used to check for valid image headers and to select images with the [[Media form field type|Media form field]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; Legal Audio Extensions (File Types)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:203--&amp;gt; Audio extensions (file types) you are allowed to upload (comma separated). These are used to check for valid audio headers and to select audio files with the [[Media form field type|Media form field]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; Legal Video Extensions (File Types)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:205--&amp;gt; Video extensions (file types) you are allowed to upload (comma separated). These are used to check for valid video headers and to select videos with the [[Media form field type|Media form field]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; Legal Document Extensions (File Types)&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:207--&amp;gt; Document extensions (file types) you are allowed to upload (comma separated). These are used to check for valid document headers and to select documents with the [[Media form field type|Media form field]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:208--&amp;gt; Ignored Extensions&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:209--&amp;gt; Ignored file extensions for MIME type checking and restricted uploads.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; Legal MIME Types&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; A comma separated list of legal MIME types to upload.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Permissions=== &amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:210--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This section lets you set up the default [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Access_Control_List&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Access Control List]] permissions for all media.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Media-Options-permissions-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:211--&amp;gt; To change the permissions for media, do the following.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:212--&amp;gt; Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group&#039;&#039;&#039; by clicking its title located on the left.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:213--&amp;gt; Find the desired &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:214--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Configure ACL &amp;amp; Options&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can edit the options and permissions.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:215--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Configure Options Only&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can edit the options exept the permissions.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:216--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Administration Interface&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can access user administration interface.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:217--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Create&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can create media.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:218--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can delete media.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:219--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can edit media.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:220--&amp;gt; Select the desired permission for the action you wish to change.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:221--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Inherited&#039;&#039;&#039;. Inherited for users in this Group from the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#permissions&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Global Configuration]] permissions.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:222--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039;. Allowed for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;!--T:223--&amp;gt; Note: If this action is Denied at one of the higher levels, the Allowed permission here will not take effect. A Denied setting cannot be overridden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:224--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Denied&#039;&#039;&#039;. Denied for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:225--&amp;gt; Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; at top. When the screen refreshes, the Calculated Setting column will show the effective permission for this Group and Action.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar== &amp;lt;!--T:39--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:226--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;#screenshot&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Screenshot]] above.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:227--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the Media options and stays in the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:228--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the Media options and closes the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:229--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:230--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Toggle Inline Help&#039;&#039;&#039;. Show help text below some options.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:231--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039;. Opens this help screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips== &amp;lt;!--T:45--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:178--&amp;gt; If you are a beginning user, you can just keep the default values here until you learn more about using global options.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:179--&amp;gt; If you are an advanced user, you can save time by creating good default values here.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information== &amp;lt;!--T:47--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:48--&amp;gt; Related Help screen: [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Media&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Media]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:232--&amp;gt; Tutorial: [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J4.x:Managing_Media&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Managing Media]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{Cathelp|4.0|Media Manager Help Screens|Content Help Screens}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Fields:_Edit&amp;diff=997781</id>
		<title>Help4.x:Fields: Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Fields:_Edit&amp;diff=997781"/>
		<updated>2023-01-10T23:07:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description== &amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can add and edit Fields in Articles, Contacts, and Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:326--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The helpscreen show as example Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access== &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:208--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;rarr&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Users,Fields}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To add a Field:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt; click the &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039; toolbar button&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:243--&amp;gt; To edit a Field:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt; Select a &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; from the list&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{anchor|screenshot}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot== &amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-screen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|800px]]&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Form Fields== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:244--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;. The Title for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General=== &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:333--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Left Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:256--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Parameters for all fields:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:247--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Type&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:245--&amp;gt; If you create a field you can choose one of the &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; field types. When you save the field this type is permanent.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:246--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Adding_custom_fields/Calendar_Field&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:248--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:249--&amp;gt; The name will be used to identify the field. Leave this blank and Joomla will fill in a default value from the title.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:250--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:251--&amp;gt; Use a descriptive text of the field for the label of the field. This text is not translatable. If you do not enter any text for a label the title text will also used as label text.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:252--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:253--&amp;gt; The description of the field. A text that will be shown as a tool tip when the user moves the mouse over the text box while he use it in the Backend creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. This text is not translatable. You do not see this description in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:254--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:255--&amp;gt; Is this a mandatory field? In this case the field has to be filled before submitting an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:334--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:257--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:258--&amp;gt; The published status of this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:259--&amp;gt; Published:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:260--&amp;gt; The field is visible while editing an article or an contact. And it is visible in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:261--&amp;gt; Unpublished:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:262--&amp;gt; The field will not be visible to users while editing an article or an contact.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:263--&amp;gt; Archived:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:264--&amp;gt; The field will no longer show on edition an article or an contact. You can open it in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#selectstatus&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Fields]] when you set the filter to archived.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:265--&amp;gt; Trashed:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:266--&amp;gt; The field is deleted but still in the database. It can be permanently deleted from the database in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#selectstatus&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Fields]] with the Empty Trash function.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:267--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J4.x:Deleting_an_Article&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:268--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Field Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:269--&amp;gt; You can assign a field to one or more field groups.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:270--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:271--&amp;gt; You can assign a field to one or more categories. Note that the default &#039;All&#039; does not include &#039;uncategorised&#039; articles.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:272--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Access&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:273--&amp;gt; Select the viewing access level for this field. The access levels depend on what has been set up in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Users: Access Levels]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:274--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:275--&amp;gt; Select the language for this field. If you are not using the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Extensions:_Languages&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|multi-language feature]] of Joomla, keep the default of &#039;All&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:276--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:277--&amp;gt; An optional field to make your personal notes for the field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options=== &amp;lt;!--T:90--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-options-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:91--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:278--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Form Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:279--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Placeholder&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:280--&amp;gt; A placeholder text which will appear inside the field as a hint for the input. The placeholder is active in the Backend while creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. You do do not see it in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:281--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Field Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:282--&amp;gt; The class attributes of the field when the field is rendered. If different classes are needed, list them with spaces.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:283--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label Class (Form)&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:327--&amp;gt; CSS class to apply to the field label when it is in edit mode (entering input into a field).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:284--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Editable In&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:285--&amp;gt; On which part of the site should the field be shown. In the Backend, in the Frontend or both?&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Showon Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;. Conditionally show or hide the field depending on the value of other fields. The syntax to use here, for example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list-of-items:value1[OR]list-of-items:value2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; list-of-items – It is the &#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039; of an already created field on which this field will depends to be show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; value1 – Is the value need have the field on which it depends to be show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; [OR] – To create a choice among multiple fields. In the example, this field will show when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field have the value: &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039; OR &#039;&#039;value2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; [AND] – To combine multiple fields. This field will show only when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field have the value: &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039; AND &#039;&#039;value2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; You can also use value &#039;does not equal&#039; as in &#039;&#039;&#039;list-of-items!:value1&#039;&#039;&#039;. The syntax will show this field only when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; is not equal to &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; To show this field when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field has been selected and have not a empty value, use the syntax &#039;&#039;list-of-items!:&#039;&#039; (without a value specified).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Subform fields handle different the identifier &#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039; of &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039;. If you create a Subform custom field and you add this conditional field you are creating to there, you need use &#039;&#039;field[ID]&#039;&#039; instead of &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039;, where ID is the id of the field &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039;. Therefore, the showon attribute for this conditional field you are creating need be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;field36:value1[OR]field36:value2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; where 36 is the ID of the field &#039;List of items&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:286--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:287--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:288--&amp;gt; The class of the field container in the output.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:289--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Value Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:303--&amp;gt; The class of the field value in the output.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:290--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:291--&amp;gt; Show the label when the field renders.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:292--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label Class (Output)&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:328--&amp;gt; CSS class to apply to the field label when it is displayed (displaying the output of a field).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:293--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Automatic Display&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:294--&amp;gt; Joomla offers some content events which are triggered during the content creation process. This is the place to define how the fields should be integrated into content. You can choose&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:295--&amp;gt; After Title&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:296--&amp;gt; Before Display Content&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:297--&amp;gt; After Display Content&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:298--&amp;gt; Do not automatically display&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:299--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Prefix&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:329--&amp;gt; Fixed text to be displayed before a field, for example &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;£&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:300--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Suffix&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:330--&amp;gt; Fixed text to be displayed after a field, for example &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;EUR&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:301--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Layout&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:331--&amp;gt; If there is a custom layout then it would be selected here.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:302--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display When Read-Only&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:332--&amp;gt; If the field is read only (perhaps the user doesn&#039;t have the access level) should the field be displayed or hidden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Publishing=== &amp;lt;!--T:99--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-publishing-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:100--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:304--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Created Date&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:305--&amp;gt; The current time when the field was created. Enter in a different date and time or click on the calendar icon to find the desired date.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:306--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Created By&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:307--&amp;gt; Name of the User who created this field. This will default to the currently logged-in user. If you want to change this to a different user, click the Select User button.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:308--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Modified Date&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:309--&amp;gt; Date of last modification.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:310--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Modified By&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:311--&amp;gt; Username who performed the last modification.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:312--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;ID&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:313--&amp;gt; A unique identification number for this field, you cannot change this number. When creating a new field, this field displays &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; until you save the new entry.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Permissions=== &amp;lt;!--T:106--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:112--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can enter permissions for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:314--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#hierarchylevels&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-permissions-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:113--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:114--&amp;gt; To change the permissions for this field, do the following.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:115--&amp;gt; Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group&#039;&#039;&#039; by clicking its title located on the left.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:116--&amp;gt; Find the desired &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:117--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can delete this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:118--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can edit this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:119--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit State&#039;&#039;&#039;. User can change the published state and related information for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:120--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Custom Field Value.&#039;&#039;&#039; Users can edit the field value.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:121--&amp;gt; Select the desired permission for the action you wish to change.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:131--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Inherited&#039;&#039;&#039;. Inherited for users in this Group from the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#permissions&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Global Configuration]], parent group, or category.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:315--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039;. Allowed for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:316--&amp;gt; Note: If this action is Denied at one of the higher levels, the Allowed permission here will not take effect. A Denied setting cannot be overridden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:317--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Denied&#039;&#039;&#039;. Denied for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:318--&amp;gt; Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; at top. When the screen refreshes, the Calculated Setting column will show the effective permission for this Group and Action.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar== &amp;lt;!--T:126--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:221--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;#screenshot&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Screenshot]] above.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:319--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and stays in the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:320--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and closes the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:321--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:322--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves your changes to a copy of the current field. Does not affect the current field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:323--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:324--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039;. Opens this help screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips== &amp;lt;!--T:138--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:139--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to know how to use fields: [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Adding_custom_fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Managing Custom Fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information== &amp;lt;!--T:140--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Fields/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:325--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2|Content Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Needs to be marked for translation]]&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Fields:_Edit&amp;diff=997780</id>
		<title>Help4.x:Fields: Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Fields:_Edit&amp;diff=997780"/>
		<updated>2023-01-10T23:03:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description== &amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can add and edit Fields in Articles, Contacts, and Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:326--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The helpscreen show as example Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access== &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:208--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;rarr&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Users,Fields}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To add a Field:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt; click the &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039; toolbar button&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:243--&amp;gt; To edit a Field:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt; Select a &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; from the list&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{anchor|screenshot}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot== &amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-screen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|800px]]&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Form Fields== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:244--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;. The Title for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General=== &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:333--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Left Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:256--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Parameters for all fields:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:247--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Type&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:245--&amp;gt; If you create a field you can choose one of the &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; field types. When you save the field this type is permanent.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:246--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Adding_custom_fields/Calendar_Field&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:248--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:249--&amp;gt; The name will be used to identify the field. Leave this blank and Joomla will fill in a default value from the title.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:250--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:251--&amp;gt; Use a descriptive text of the field for the label of the field. This text is not translatable. If you do not enter any text for a label the title text will also used as label text.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:252--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:253--&amp;gt; The description of the field. A text that will be shown as a tool tip when the user moves the mouse over the text box while he use it in the Backend creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. This text is not translatable. You do not see this description in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:254--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:255--&amp;gt; Is this a mandatory field? In this case the field has to be filled before submitting an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:334--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:257--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:258--&amp;gt; The published status of this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:259--&amp;gt; Published:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:260--&amp;gt; The field is visible while editing an article or an contact. And it is visible in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:261--&amp;gt; Unpublished:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:262--&amp;gt; The field will not be visible to users while editing an article or an contact.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:263--&amp;gt; Archived:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:264--&amp;gt; The field will no longer show on edition an article or an contact. You can open it in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#selectstatus&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Fields]] when you set the filter to archived.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:265--&amp;gt; Trashed:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:266--&amp;gt; The field is deleted but still in the database. It can be permanently deleted from the database in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#selectstatus&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Fields]] with the Empty Trash function.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:267--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J4.x:Deleting_an_Article&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:268--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Field Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:269--&amp;gt; You can assign a field to one or more field groups.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:270--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:271--&amp;gt; You can assign a field to one or more categories. Note that the default &#039;All&#039; does not include &#039;uncategorised&#039; articles.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:272--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Access&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:273--&amp;gt; Select the viewing access level for this field. The access levels depend on what has been set up in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Users: Access Levels]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:274--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:275--&amp;gt; Select the language for this field. If you are not using the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Extensions:_Languages&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|multi-language feature]] of Joomla, keep the default of &#039;All&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:276--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:277--&amp;gt; An optional field to make your personal notes for the field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options=== &amp;lt;!--T:90--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-options-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:91--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:278--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Form Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:279--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Placeholder&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:280--&amp;gt; A placeholder text which will appear inside the field as a hint for the input. The placeholder is active in the Backend while creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. You do do not see it in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:281--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Field Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:282--&amp;gt; The class attributes of the field when the field is rendered. If different classes are needed, list them with spaces.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:283--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label Class (Form)&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:327--&amp;gt; CSS class to apply to the field label when it is in edit mode (entering input into a field).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:284--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Editable In&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:285--&amp;gt; On which part of the site should the field be shown. In the Backend, in the Frontend or both?&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Showon Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;. Conditionally show or hide the field depending on the value of other fields. The syntax to use here, for example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list-of-items:value1[OR]list-of-items:value2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; list-of-items – It is the &#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039; of an already created field on which this field will depends to be show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; value1 – Is the value need have the field on which it depends to be show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; [OR] – To create a choice among multiple fields. In the example, this field will show when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field have the value: &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039; OR &#039;&#039;value2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; [AND] – To combine multiple fields. This field will show only when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field have the value: &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039; AND &#039;&#039;value2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; You can also use value &#039;does not equal&#039; as in &#039;&#039;&#039;list-of-items!:value1&#039;&#039;&#039;. The syntax will show this field only when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; is not equal to &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; To show this field when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field has been selected and have not a empty value, use the syntax &#039;&#039;list-of-items!:&#039;&#039; (without a value specified).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Subform fields handle different the identifier &#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039; of &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039;. If you create a Subform custom field and you add this conditional field you are creating to there, you need use &#039;&#039;field[ID]&#039;&#039; instead of &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039;, where ID is the id of the field &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039;. Therefore, the showon attribute for this conditional field you are creating need be:&lt;br /&gt;
field36:value1[OR]field36:value2 where 36 is the ID of the field &#039;List of items&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:286--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:287--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:288--&amp;gt; The class of the field container in the output.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:289--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Value Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:303--&amp;gt; The class of the field value in the output.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:290--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:291--&amp;gt; Show the label when the field renders.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:292--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label Class (Output)&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:328--&amp;gt; CSS class to apply to the field label when it is displayed (displaying the output of a field).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:293--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Automatic Display&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:294--&amp;gt; Joomla offers some content events which are triggered during the content creation process. This is the place to define how the fields should be integrated into content. You can choose&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:295--&amp;gt; After Title&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:296--&amp;gt; Before Display Content&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:297--&amp;gt; After Display Content&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:298--&amp;gt; Do not automatically display&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:299--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Prefix&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:329--&amp;gt; Fixed text to be displayed before a field, for example &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;£&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:300--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Suffix&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:330--&amp;gt; Fixed text to be displayed after a field, for example &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;EUR&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:301--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Layout&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:331--&amp;gt; If there is a custom layout then it would be selected here.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:302--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display When Read-Only&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:332--&amp;gt; If the field is read only (perhaps the user doesn&#039;t have the access level) should the field be displayed or hidden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Publishing=== &amp;lt;!--T:99--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-publishing-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:100--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:304--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Created Date&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:305--&amp;gt; The current time when the field was created. Enter in a different date and time or click on the calendar icon to find the desired date.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:306--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Created By&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:307--&amp;gt; Name of the User who created this field. This will default to the currently logged-in user. If you want to change this to a different user, click the Select User button.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:308--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Modified Date&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:309--&amp;gt; Date of last modification.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:310--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Modified By&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:311--&amp;gt; Username who performed the last modification.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:312--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;ID&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:313--&amp;gt; A unique identification number for this field, you cannot change this number. When creating a new field, this field displays &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; until you save the new entry.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Permissions=== &amp;lt;!--T:106--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:112--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can enter permissions for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:314--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#hierarchylevels&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-permissions-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:113--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:114--&amp;gt; To change the permissions for this field, do the following.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:115--&amp;gt; Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group&#039;&#039;&#039; by clicking its title located on the left.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:116--&amp;gt; Find the desired &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:117--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can delete this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:118--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can edit this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:119--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit State&#039;&#039;&#039;. User can change the published state and related information for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:120--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Custom Field Value.&#039;&#039;&#039; Users can edit the field value.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:121--&amp;gt; Select the desired permission for the action you wish to change.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:131--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Inherited&#039;&#039;&#039;. Inherited for users in this Group from the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#permissions&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Global Configuration]], parent group, or category.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:315--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039;. Allowed for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:316--&amp;gt; Note: If this action is Denied at one of the higher levels, the Allowed permission here will not take effect. A Denied setting cannot be overridden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:317--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Denied&#039;&#039;&#039;. Denied for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:318--&amp;gt; Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; at top. When the screen refreshes, the Calculated Setting column will show the effective permission for this Group and Action.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar== &amp;lt;!--T:126--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:221--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;#screenshot&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Screenshot]] above.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:319--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and stays in the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:320--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and closes the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:321--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:322--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves your changes to a copy of the current field. Does not affect the current field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:323--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:324--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039;. Opens this help screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips== &amp;lt;!--T:138--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:139--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to know how to use fields: [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Adding_custom_fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Managing Custom Fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information== &amp;lt;!--T:140--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Fields/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:325--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2|Content Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Needs to be marked for translation]]&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Fields:_Edit&amp;diff=997779</id>
		<title>Help4.x:Fields: Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Fields:_Edit&amp;diff=997779"/>
		<updated>2023-01-10T23:00:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description== &amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can add and edit Fields in Articles, Contacts, and Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:326--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The helpscreen show as example Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access== &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:208--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;rarr&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Users,Fields}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To add a Field:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt; click the &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039; toolbar button&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:243--&amp;gt; To edit a Field:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt; Select a &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; from the list&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{anchor|screenshot}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot== &amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-screen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|800px]]&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Form Fields== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:244--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;. The Title for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General=== &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:333--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Left Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:256--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Parameters for all fields:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:247--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Type&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:245--&amp;gt; If you create a field you can choose one of the &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; field types. When you save the field this type is permanent.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:246--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Adding_custom_fields/Calendar_Field&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:248--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:249--&amp;gt; The name will be used to identify the field. Leave this blank and Joomla will fill in a default value from the title.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:250--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:251--&amp;gt; Use a descriptive text of the field for the label of the field. This text is not translatable. If you do not enter any text for a label the title text will also used as label text.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:252--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:253--&amp;gt; The description of the field. A text that will be shown as a tool tip when the user moves the mouse over the text box while he use it in the Backend creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. This text is not translatable. You do not see this description in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:254--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:255--&amp;gt; Is this a mandatory field? In this case the field has to be filled before submitting an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:334--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:257--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:258--&amp;gt; The published status of this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:259--&amp;gt; Published:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:260--&amp;gt; The field is visible while editing an article or an contact. And it is visible in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:261--&amp;gt; Unpublished:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:262--&amp;gt; The field will not be visible to users while editing an article or an contact.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:263--&amp;gt; Archived:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:264--&amp;gt; The field will no longer show on edition an article or an contact. You can open it in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#selectstatus&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Fields]] when you set the filter to archived.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:265--&amp;gt; Trashed:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:266--&amp;gt; The field is deleted but still in the database. It can be permanently deleted from the database in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#selectstatus&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Fields]] with the Empty Trash function.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:267--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J4.x:Deleting_an_Article&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:268--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Field Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:269--&amp;gt; You can assign a field to one or more field groups.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:270--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:271--&amp;gt; You can assign a field to one or more categories. Note that the default &#039;All&#039; does not include &#039;uncategorised&#039; articles.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:272--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Access&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:273--&amp;gt; Select the viewing access level for this field. The access levels depend on what has been set up in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Users: Access Levels]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:274--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:275--&amp;gt; Select the language for this field. If you are not using the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Extensions:_Languages&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|multi-language feature]] of Joomla, keep the default of &#039;All&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:276--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:277--&amp;gt; An optional field to make your personal notes for the field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options=== &amp;lt;!--T:90--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-options-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:91--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:278--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Form Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:279--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Placeholder&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:280--&amp;gt; A placeholder text which will appear inside the field as a hint for the input. The placeholder is active in the Backend while creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. You do do not see it in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:281--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Field Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:282--&amp;gt; The class attributes of the field when the field is rendered. If different classes are needed, list them with spaces.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:283--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label Class (Form)&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:327--&amp;gt; CSS class to apply to the field label when it is in edit mode (entering input into a field).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:284--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Editable In&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:285--&amp;gt; On which part of the site should the field be shown. In the Backend, in the Frontend or both?&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Showon Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;. Conditionally show or hide the field depending on the value of other fields. The syntax to use here, for example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list-of-items:value1[OR]list-of-items:value2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; list-of-items – It is the &#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039; of an already created field on which this field will depends to be show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; value1 – Is the value need have the field on which it depends to be show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; [OR] – To create a choice among multiple fields. In the example, this field will show when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field have the value: &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039; OR &#039;&#039;value2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; [AND] – To combine multiple fields. This field will show only when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field have the value: &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039; AND &#039;&#039;value2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; You can also use value &#039;does not equal&#039; as in &#039;&#039;&#039;list-of-items!:value1&#039;&#039;&#039;. The syntax will show this field only when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; is not equal to &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; To show this field when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field has been selected and have not a empty value, use the syntax &#039;&#039;list-of-items!:&#039;&#039; (without a value specified).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Subform fields handle different the &#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039; of the &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039;. If you create a Subform cutom field and you add this conditional field you are creating to there, you need use &#039;&#039;field[ID]&#039;&#039; instead of &#039;&#039;list-of-items:value1&#039;&#039;, where ID is the id of the field. Therefore, the showon attribute for this conditional field you are creating need be:&lt;br /&gt;
field36:value1[OR]field36:value2 where 36 is the ID of the field &#039;List of items&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:286--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:287--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:288--&amp;gt; The class of the field container in the output.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:289--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Value Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:303--&amp;gt; The class of the field value in the output.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:290--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:291--&amp;gt; Show the label when the field renders.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:292--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label Class (Output)&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:328--&amp;gt; CSS class to apply to the field label when it is displayed (displaying the output of a field).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:293--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Automatic Display&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:294--&amp;gt; Joomla offers some content events which are triggered during the content creation process. This is the place to define how the fields should be integrated into content. You can choose&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:295--&amp;gt; After Title&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:296--&amp;gt; Before Display Content&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:297--&amp;gt; After Display Content&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:298--&amp;gt; Do not automatically display&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:299--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Prefix&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:329--&amp;gt; Fixed text to be displayed before a field, for example &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;£&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:300--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Suffix&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:330--&amp;gt; Fixed text to be displayed after a field, for example &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;EUR&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:301--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Layout&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:331--&amp;gt; If there is a custom layout then it would be selected here.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:302--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display When Read-Only&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:332--&amp;gt; If the field is read only (perhaps the user doesn&#039;t have the access level) should the field be displayed or hidden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Publishing=== &amp;lt;!--T:99--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-publishing-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:100--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:304--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Created Date&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:305--&amp;gt; The current time when the field was created. Enter in a different date and time or click on the calendar icon to find the desired date.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:306--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Created By&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:307--&amp;gt; Name of the User who created this field. This will default to the currently logged-in user. If you want to change this to a different user, click the Select User button.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:308--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Modified Date&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:309--&amp;gt; Date of last modification.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:310--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Modified By&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:311--&amp;gt; Username who performed the last modification.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:312--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;ID&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:313--&amp;gt; A unique identification number for this field, you cannot change this number. When creating a new field, this field displays &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; until you save the new entry.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Permissions=== &amp;lt;!--T:106--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:112--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can enter permissions for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:314--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#hierarchylevels&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-permissions-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:113--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:114--&amp;gt; To change the permissions for this field, do the following.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:115--&amp;gt; Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group&#039;&#039;&#039; by clicking its title located on the left.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:116--&amp;gt; Find the desired &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:117--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can delete this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:118--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can edit this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:119--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit State&#039;&#039;&#039;. User can change the published state and related information for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:120--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Custom Field Value.&#039;&#039;&#039; Users can edit the field value.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:121--&amp;gt; Select the desired permission for the action you wish to change.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:131--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Inherited&#039;&#039;&#039;. Inherited for users in this Group from the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#permissions&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Global Configuration]], parent group, or category.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:315--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039;. Allowed for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:316--&amp;gt; Note: If this action is Denied at one of the higher levels, the Allowed permission here will not take effect. A Denied setting cannot be overridden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:317--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Denied&#039;&#039;&#039;. Denied for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:318--&amp;gt; Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; at top. When the screen refreshes, the Calculated Setting column will show the effective permission for this Group and Action.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar== &amp;lt;!--T:126--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:221--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;#screenshot&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Screenshot]] above.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:319--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and stays in the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:320--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and closes the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:321--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:322--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves your changes to a copy of the current field. Does not affect the current field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:323--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:324--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039;. Opens this help screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips== &amp;lt;!--T:138--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:139--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to know how to use fields: [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Adding_custom_fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Managing Custom Fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information== &amp;lt;!--T:140--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Fields/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:325--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2|Content Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Needs to be marked for translation]]&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Fields:_Edit&amp;diff=997777</id>
		<title>Help4.x:Fields: Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Fields:_Edit&amp;diff=997777"/>
		<updated>2023-01-10T22:28:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description== &amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can add and edit Fields in Articles, Contacts, and Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:326--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The helpscreen show as example Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access== &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:208--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;rarr&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Users,Fields}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To add a Field:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt; click the &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039; toolbar button&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:243--&amp;gt; To edit a Field:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt; Select a &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; from the list&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{anchor|screenshot}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot== &amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-screen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|800px]]&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Form Fields== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:244--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;. The Title for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General=== &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:333--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Left Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:256--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Parameters for all fields:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:247--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Type&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:245--&amp;gt; If you create a field you can choose one of the &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; field types. When you save the field this type is permanent.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:246--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Adding_custom_fields/Calendar_Field&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:248--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:249--&amp;gt; The name will be used to identify the field. Leave this blank and Joomla will fill in a default value from the title.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:250--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:251--&amp;gt; Use a descriptive text of the field for the label of the field. This text is not translatable. If you do not enter any text for a label the title text will also used as label text.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:252--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:253--&amp;gt; The description of the field. A text that will be shown as a tool tip when the user moves the mouse over the text box while he use it in the Backend creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. This text is not translatable. You do not see this description in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:254--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:255--&amp;gt; Is this a mandatory field? In this case the field has to be filled before submitting an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:334--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:257--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:258--&amp;gt; The published status of this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:259--&amp;gt; Published:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:260--&amp;gt; The field is visible while editing an article or an contact. And it is visible in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:261--&amp;gt; Unpublished:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:262--&amp;gt; The field will not be visible to users while editing an article or an contact.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:263--&amp;gt; Archived:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:264--&amp;gt; The field will no longer show on edition an article or an contact. You can open it in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#selectstatus&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Fields]] when you set the filter to archived.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:265--&amp;gt; Trashed:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:266--&amp;gt; The field is deleted but still in the database. It can be permanently deleted from the database in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#selectstatus&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Fields]] with the Empty Trash function.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:267--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J4.x:Deleting_an_Article&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:268--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Field Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:269--&amp;gt; You can assign a field to one or more field groups.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:270--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:271--&amp;gt; You can assign a field to one or more categories. Note that the default &#039;All&#039; does not include &#039;uncategorised&#039; articles.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:272--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Access&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:273--&amp;gt; Select the viewing access level for this field. The access levels depend on what has been set up in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Users: Access Levels]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:274--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:275--&amp;gt; Select the language for this field. If you are not using the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Extensions:_Languages&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|multi-language feature]] of Joomla, keep the default of &#039;All&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:276--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:277--&amp;gt; An optional field to make your personal notes for the field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options=== &amp;lt;!--T:90--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-options-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:91--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:278--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Form Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:279--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Placeholder&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:280--&amp;gt; A placeholder text which will appear inside the field as a hint for the input. The placeholder is active in the Backend while creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. You do do not see it in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:281--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Field Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:282--&amp;gt; The class attributes of the field when the field is rendered. If different classes are needed, list them with spaces.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:283--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label Class (Form)&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:327--&amp;gt; CSS class to apply to the field label when it is in edit mode (entering input into a field).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:284--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Editable In&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:285--&amp;gt; On which part of the site should the field be shown. In the Backend, in the Frontend or both?&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Showon Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;. Conditionally show or hide the field depending on the value of other fields. The syntax to use here, for example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list-of-items:value1[OR]list-of-items:value2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; list-of-items – It is the &#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039; of an already created field on which this field will depends to be show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; value1 – Is the value need have the field on which it depends to be show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; [OR] – To create a choice among multiple fields. In the example, this field will show when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field have the value: &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039; OR &#039;&#039;value2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; [AND] – To combine multiple fields. This field will show only when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field have the value: &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039; AND &#039;&#039;value2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; You can also use value &#039;does not equal&#039; as in &#039;&#039;&#039;list-of-items!:value1&#039;&#039;&#039;. The syntax will show this field only when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; is not equal to &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; To show this field when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field has been selected and have not a empty value, use the syntax &#039;&#039;list-of-items!:&#039;&#039; (without a value specified).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:286--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:287--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:288--&amp;gt; The class of the field container in the output.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:289--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Value Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:303--&amp;gt; The class of the field value in the output.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:290--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:291--&amp;gt; Show the label when the field renders.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:292--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label Class (Output)&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:328--&amp;gt; CSS class to apply to the field label when it is displayed (displaying the output of a field).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:293--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Automatic Display&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:294--&amp;gt; Joomla offers some content events which are triggered during the content creation process. This is the place to define how the fields should be integrated into content. You can choose&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:295--&amp;gt; After Title&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:296--&amp;gt; Before Display Content&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:297--&amp;gt; After Display Content&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:298--&amp;gt; Do not automatically display&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:299--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Prefix&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:329--&amp;gt; Fixed text to be displayed before a field, for example &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;£&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:300--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Suffix&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:330--&amp;gt; Fixed text to be displayed after a field, for example &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;EUR&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:301--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Layout&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:331--&amp;gt; If there is a custom layout then it would be selected here.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:302--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display When Read-Only&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:332--&amp;gt; If the field is read only (perhaps the user doesn&#039;t have the access level) should the field be displayed or hidden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Publishing=== &amp;lt;!--T:99--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-publishing-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:100--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:304--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Created Date&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:305--&amp;gt; The current time when the field was created. Enter in a different date and time or click on the calendar icon to find the desired date.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:306--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Created By&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:307--&amp;gt; Name of the User who created this field. This will default to the currently logged-in user. If you want to change this to a different user, click the Select User button.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:308--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Modified Date&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:309--&amp;gt; Date of last modification.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:310--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Modified By&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:311--&amp;gt; Username who performed the last modification.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:312--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;ID&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:313--&amp;gt; A unique identification number for this field, you cannot change this number. When creating a new field, this field displays &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; until you save the new entry.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Permissions=== &amp;lt;!--T:106--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:112--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can enter permissions for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:314--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#hierarchylevels&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-permissions-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:113--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:114--&amp;gt; To change the permissions for this field, do the following.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:115--&amp;gt; Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group&#039;&#039;&#039; by clicking its title located on the left.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:116--&amp;gt; Find the desired &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:117--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can delete this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:118--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can edit this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:119--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit State&#039;&#039;&#039;. User can change the published state and related information for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:120--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Custom Field Value.&#039;&#039;&#039; Users can edit the field value.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:121--&amp;gt; Select the desired permission for the action you wish to change.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:131--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Inherited&#039;&#039;&#039;. Inherited for users in this Group from the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#permissions&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Global Configuration]], parent group, or category.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:315--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039;. Allowed for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:316--&amp;gt; Note: If this action is Denied at one of the higher levels, the Allowed permission here will not take effect. A Denied setting cannot be overridden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:317--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Denied&#039;&#039;&#039;. Denied for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:318--&amp;gt; Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; at top. When the screen refreshes, the Calculated Setting column will show the effective permission for this Group and Action.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar== &amp;lt;!--T:126--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:221--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;#screenshot&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Screenshot]] above.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:319--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and stays in the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:320--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and closes the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:321--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:322--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves your changes to a copy of the current field. Does not affect the current field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:323--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:324--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039;. Opens this help screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips== &amp;lt;!--T:138--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:139--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to know how to use fields: [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Adding_custom_fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Managing Custom Fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information== &amp;lt;!--T:140--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Fields/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:325--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2|Content Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Needs to be marked for translation]]&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Fields:_Edit&amp;diff=997776</id>
		<title>Help4.x:Fields: Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Fields:_Edit&amp;diff=997776"/>
		<updated>2023-01-10T22:26:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description== &amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can add and edit Fields in Articles, Contacts, and Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:326--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The helpscreen show as example Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access== &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:208--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;rarr&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Users,Fields}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To add a Field:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt; click the &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039; toolbar button&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:243--&amp;gt; To edit a Field:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt; Select a &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; from the list&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{anchor|screenshot}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot== &amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-screen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|800px]]&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Form Fields== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:244--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;. The Title for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General=== &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:333--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Left Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:256--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Parameters for all fields:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:247--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Type&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:245--&amp;gt; If you create a field you can choose one of the &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; field types. When you save the field this type is permanent.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:246--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Adding_custom_fields/Calendar_Field&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:248--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:249--&amp;gt; The name will be used to identify the field. Leave this blank and Joomla will fill in a default value from the title.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:250--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:251--&amp;gt; Use a descriptive text of the field for the label of the field. This text is not translatable. If you do not enter any text for a label the title text will also used as label text.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:252--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:253--&amp;gt; The description of the field. A text that will be shown as a tool tip when the user moves the mouse over the text box while he use it in the Backend creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. This text is not translatable. You do not see this description in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:254--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:255--&amp;gt; Is this a mandatory field? In this case the field has to be filled before submitting an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:334--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:257--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:258--&amp;gt; The published status of this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:259--&amp;gt; Published:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:260--&amp;gt; The field is visible while editing an article or an contact. And it is visible in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:261--&amp;gt; Unpublished:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:262--&amp;gt; The field will not be visible to users while editing an article or an contact.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:263--&amp;gt; Archived:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:264--&amp;gt; The field will no longer show on edition an article or an contact. You can open it in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#selectstatus&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Fields]] when you set the filter to archived.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:265--&amp;gt; Trashed:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:266--&amp;gt; The field is deleted but still in the database. It can be permanently deleted from the database in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#selectstatus&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Fields]] with the Empty Trash function.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:267--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J4.x:Deleting_an_Article&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:268--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Field Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:269--&amp;gt; You can assign a field to one or more field groups.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:270--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:271--&amp;gt; You can assign a field to one or more categories. Note that the default &#039;All&#039; does not include &#039;uncategorised&#039; articles.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:272--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Access&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:273--&amp;gt; Select the viewing access level for this field. The access levels depend on what has been set up in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Users: Access Levels]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:274--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:275--&amp;gt; Select the language for this field. If you are not using the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Extensions:_Languages&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|multi-language feature]] of Joomla, keep the default of &#039;All&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:276--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:277--&amp;gt; An optional field to make your personal notes for the field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options=== &amp;lt;!--T:90--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-options-subscreen&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:91--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|800px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:278--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Form Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:279--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Placeholder&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:280--&amp;gt; A placeholder text which will appear inside the field as a hint for the input. The placeholder is active in the Backend while creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. You do do not see it in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:281--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Field Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:282--&amp;gt; The class attributes of the field when the field is rendered. If different classes are needed, list them with spaces.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:283--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label Class (Form)&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:327--&amp;gt; CSS class to apply to the field label when it is in edit mode (entering input into a field).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:284--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Editable In&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:285--&amp;gt; On which part of the site should the field be shown. In the Backend, in the Frontend or both?&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Showon Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;. Conditionally show or hide the field depending on the value of other fields. The syntax to use here, for example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list-of-items:value1[OR]list-of-items:value2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; list-of-items – It is the &#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039; of an already created field on which this field will depends to be show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; value1 – Is the value need have the field on which it depends to be show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; [OR] – To create a choice among multiple fields. In the example, this field will show when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field have the value: &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039; OR &#039;&#039;value2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; [AND] – To combine multiple fields. This field will show only when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field have the value: &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039; AND &#039;&#039;value2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; You can also use value &#039;does not equal&#039; as in &#039;&#039;&#039;list-of-items!:value1&#039;&#039;&#039;. The syntax will show this field only when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; is not equal to &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; To show this field when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field has been selected and have not a empty value, use the syntax &#039;&#039;list-of-items!:&#039;&#039; (without a value specified).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:286--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:287--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:288--&amp;gt; The class of the field container in the output.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:289--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Value Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:303--&amp;gt; The class of the field value in the output.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:290--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:291--&amp;gt; Show the label when the field renders.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:292--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label Class (Output)&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:328--&amp;gt; CSS class to apply to the field label when it is displayed (displaying the output of a field).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:293--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Automatic Display&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:294--&amp;gt; Joomla offers some content events which are triggered during the content creation process. This is the place to define how the fields should be integrated into content. You can choose&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:295--&amp;gt; After Title&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:296--&amp;gt; Before Display Content&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:297--&amp;gt; After Display Content&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:298--&amp;gt; Do not automatically display&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:299--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Prefix&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:329--&amp;gt; Fixed text to be displayed before a field, for example &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;£&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:300--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Suffix&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:330--&amp;gt; Fixed text to be displayed after a field, for example &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;EUR&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:301--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Layout&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:331--&amp;gt; If there is a custom layout then it would be selected here.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:302--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display When Read-Only&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:332--&amp;gt; If the field is read only (perhaps the user doesn&#039;t have the access level) should the field be displayed or hidden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Publishing=== &amp;lt;!--T:99--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-publishing-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:100--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:304--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Created Date&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:305--&amp;gt; The current time when the field was created. Enter in a different date and time or click on the calendar icon to find the desired date.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:306--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Created By&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:307--&amp;gt; Name of the User who created this field. This will default to the currently logged-in user. If you want to change this to a different user, click the Select User button.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:308--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Modified Date&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:309--&amp;gt; Date of last modification.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:310--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Modified By&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:311--&amp;gt; Username who performed the last modification.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:312--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;ID&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:313--&amp;gt; A unique identification number for this field, you cannot change this number. When creating a new field, this field displays &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; until you save the new entry.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Permissions=== &amp;lt;!--T:106--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:112--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can enter permissions for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:314--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#hierarchylevels&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-permissions-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:113--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:114--&amp;gt; To change the permissions for this field, do the following.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:115--&amp;gt; Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group&#039;&#039;&#039; by clicking its title located on the left.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:116--&amp;gt; Find the desired &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:117--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can delete this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:118--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can edit this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:119--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit State&#039;&#039;&#039;. User can change the published state and related information for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:120--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Custom Field Value.&#039;&#039;&#039; Users can edit the field value.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:121--&amp;gt; Select the desired permission for the action you wish to change.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:131--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Inherited&#039;&#039;&#039;. Inherited for users in this Group from the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#permissions&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Global Configuration]], parent group, or category.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:315--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039;. Allowed for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:316--&amp;gt; Note: If this action is Denied at one of the higher levels, the Allowed permission here will not take effect. A Denied setting cannot be overridden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:317--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Denied&#039;&#039;&#039;. Denied for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:318--&amp;gt; Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; at top. When the screen refreshes, the Calculated Setting column will show the effective permission for this Group and Action.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar== &amp;lt;!--T:126--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:221--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;#screenshot&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Screenshot]] above.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:319--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and stays in the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:320--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and closes the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:321--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:322--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves your changes to a copy of the current field. Does not affect the current field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:323--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:324--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039;. Opens this help screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips== &amp;lt;!--T:138--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:139--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to know how to use fields: [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Adding_custom_fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Managing Custom Fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information== &amp;lt;!--T:140--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Fields/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:325--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2|Content Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Needs to be marked for translation]]&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Fields:_Edit&amp;diff=997775</id>
		<title>Help4.x:Fields: Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Fields:_Edit&amp;diff=997775"/>
		<updated>2023-01-10T22:03:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description== &amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can add and edit Fields in Articles, Contacts, and Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:326--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The helpscreen show as example Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access== &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:208--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;rarr&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Users,Fields}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To add a Field:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt; click the &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039; toolbar button&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:243--&amp;gt; To edit a Field:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt; Select a &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; from the list&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{anchor|screenshot}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot== &amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-screen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|800px]]&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Form Fields== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:244--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;. The Title for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General=== &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:333--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Left Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:256--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Parameters for all fields:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:247--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Type&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:245--&amp;gt; If you create a field you can choose one of the &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; field types. When you save the field this type is permanent.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:246--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Adding_custom_fields/Calendar_Field&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:248--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:249--&amp;gt; The name will be used to identify the field. Leave this blank and Joomla will fill in a default value from the title.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:250--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:251--&amp;gt; Use a descriptive text of the field for the label of the field. This text is not translatable. If you do not enter any text for a label the title text will also used as label text.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:252--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:253--&amp;gt; The description of the field. A text that will be shown as a tool tip when the user moves the mouse over the text box while he use it in the Backend creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. This text is not translatable. You do not see this description in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:254--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:255--&amp;gt; Is this a mandatory field? In this case the field has to be filled before submitting an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:334--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:257--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:258--&amp;gt; The published status of this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:259--&amp;gt; Published:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:260--&amp;gt; The field is visible while editing an article or an contact. And it is visible in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:261--&amp;gt; Unpublished:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:262--&amp;gt; The field will not be visible to users while editing an article or an contact.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:263--&amp;gt; Archived:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:264--&amp;gt; The field will no longer show on edition an article or an contact. You can open it in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#selectstatus&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Fields]] when you set the filter to archived.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:265--&amp;gt; Trashed:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:266--&amp;gt; The field is deleted but still in the database. It can be permanently deleted from the database in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#selectstatus&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Fields]] with the Empty Trash function.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:267--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J4.x:Deleting_an_Article&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:268--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Field Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:269--&amp;gt; You can assign a field to one or more field groups.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:270--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:271--&amp;gt; You can assign a field to one or more categories. Note that the default &#039;All&#039; does not include &#039;uncategorised&#039; articles.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:272--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Access&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:273--&amp;gt; Select the viewing access level for this field. The access levels depend on what has been set up in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Users: Access Levels]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:274--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:275--&amp;gt; Select the language for this field. If you are not using the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Extensions:_Languages&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|multi-language feature]] of Joomla, keep the default of &#039;All&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:276--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:277--&amp;gt; An optional field to make your personal notes for the field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options=== &amp;lt;!--T:90--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fieldshow.png|800px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:278--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Form Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:279--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Placeholder&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:280--&amp;gt; A placeholder text which will appear inside the field as a hint for the input. The placeholder is active in the Backend while creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. You do do not see it in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:281--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Field Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:282--&amp;gt; The class attributes of the field when the field is rendered. If different classes are needed, list them with spaces.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:283--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label Class (Form)&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:327--&amp;gt; CSS class to apply to the field label when it is in edit mode (entering input into a field).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:284--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Editable In&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:285--&amp;gt; On which part of the site should the field be shown. In the Backend, in the Frontend or both?&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Showon Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;. Conditionally show or hide the field depending on the value of other fields. The syntax to use here, for example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list-of-items:value1[OR]list-of-items:value2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; list-of-items – It is the &#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039; of an already created field on which this field will depends to be show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; value1 – Is the value need have the field on which it depends to be show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; [OR] – To create a choice among multiple fields. In the example, this field will show when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field have the value: &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039; OR &#039;&#039;value2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; [AND] – To combine multiple fields. This field will show only when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field have the value: &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039; AND &#039;&#039;value2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; You can also use value &#039;does not equal&#039; as in &#039;&#039;&#039;list-of-items!:value1&#039;&#039;&#039;. The syntax will show this field only when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; is not equal to &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; To show this field when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field has been selected and have not a empty value, use the syntax &#039;&#039;list-of-items!:&#039;&#039; (without a value specified).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:286--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:287--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:288--&amp;gt; The class of the field container in the output.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:289--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Value Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:303--&amp;gt; The class of the field value in the output.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:290--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:291--&amp;gt; Show the label when the field renders.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:292--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label Class (Output)&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:328--&amp;gt; CSS class to apply to the field label when it is displayed (displaying the output of a field).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:293--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Automatic Display&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:294--&amp;gt; Joomla offers some content events which are triggered during the content creation process. This is the place to define how the fields should be integrated into content. You can choose&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:295--&amp;gt; After Title&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:296--&amp;gt; Before Display Content&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:297--&amp;gt; After Display Content&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:298--&amp;gt; Do not automatically display&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:299--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Prefix&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:329--&amp;gt; Fixed text to be displayed before a field, for example &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;£&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:300--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Suffix&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:330--&amp;gt; Fixed text to be displayed after a field, for example &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;EUR&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:301--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Layout&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:331--&amp;gt; If there is a custom layout then it would be selected here.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:302--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display When Read-Only&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:332--&amp;gt; If the field is read only (perhaps the user doesn&#039;t have the access level) should the field be displayed or hidden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Publishing=== &amp;lt;!--T:99--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-publishing-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:100--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:304--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Created Date&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:305--&amp;gt; The current time when the field was created. Enter in a different date and time or click on the calendar icon to find the desired date.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:306--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Created By&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:307--&amp;gt; Name of the User who created this field. This will default to the currently logged-in user. If you want to change this to a different user, click the Select User button.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:308--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Modified Date&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:309--&amp;gt; Date of last modification.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:310--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Modified By&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:311--&amp;gt; Username who performed the last modification.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:312--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;ID&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:313--&amp;gt; A unique identification number for this field, you cannot change this number. When creating a new field, this field displays &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; until you save the new entry.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Permissions=== &amp;lt;!--T:106--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:112--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can enter permissions for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:314--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#hierarchylevels&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-permissions-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:113--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:114--&amp;gt; To change the permissions for this field, do the following.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:115--&amp;gt; Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group&#039;&#039;&#039; by clicking its title located on the left.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:116--&amp;gt; Find the desired &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:117--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can delete this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:118--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can edit this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:119--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit State&#039;&#039;&#039;. User can change the published state and related information for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:120--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Custom Field Value.&#039;&#039;&#039; Users can edit the field value.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:121--&amp;gt; Select the desired permission for the action you wish to change.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:131--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Inherited&#039;&#039;&#039;. Inherited for users in this Group from the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#permissions&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Global Configuration]], parent group, or category.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:315--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039;. Allowed for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:316--&amp;gt; Note: If this action is Denied at one of the higher levels, the Allowed permission here will not take effect. A Denied setting cannot be overridden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:317--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Denied&#039;&#039;&#039;. Denied for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:318--&amp;gt; Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; at top. When the screen refreshes, the Calculated Setting column will show the effective permission for this Group and Action.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar== &amp;lt;!--T:126--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:221--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;#screenshot&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Screenshot]] above.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:319--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and stays in the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:320--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and closes the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:321--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:322--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves your changes to a copy of the current field. Does not affect the current field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:323--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:324--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039;. Opens this help screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips== &amp;lt;!--T:138--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:139--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to know how to use fields: [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Adding_custom_fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Managing Custom Fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information== &amp;lt;!--T:140--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Fields/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:325--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2|Content Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Needs to be marked for translation]]&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Fields:_Edit&amp;diff=997774</id>
		<title>Help4.x:Fields: Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Fields:_Edit&amp;diff=997774"/>
		<updated>2023-01-10T22:01:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description== &amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can add and edit Fields in Articles, Contacts, and Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:326--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The helpscreen show as example Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access== &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:208--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;rarr&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Users,Fields}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To add a Field:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt; click the &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039; toolbar button&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:243--&amp;gt; To edit a Field:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt; Select a &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; from the list&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{anchor|screenshot}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot== &amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-screen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|800px]]&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Form Fields== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:244--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;. The Title for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General=== &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:333--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Left Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:256--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Parameters for all fields:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:247--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Type&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:245--&amp;gt; If you create a field you can choose one of the &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; field types. When you save the field this type is permanent.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:246--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Adding_custom_fields/Calendar_Field&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:248--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:249--&amp;gt; The name will be used to identify the field. Leave this blank and Joomla will fill in a default value from the title.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:250--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:251--&amp;gt; Use a descriptive text of the field for the label of the field. This text is not translatable. If you do not enter any text for a label the title text will also used as label text.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:252--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:253--&amp;gt; The description of the field. A text that will be shown as a tool tip when the user moves the mouse over the text box while he use it in the Backend creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. This text is not translatable. You do not see this description in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:254--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:255--&amp;gt; Is this a mandatory field? In this case the field has to be filled before submitting an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:334--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:257--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:258--&amp;gt; The published status of this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:259--&amp;gt; Published:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:260--&amp;gt; The field is visible while editing an article or an contact. And it is visible in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:261--&amp;gt; Unpublished:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:262--&amp;gt; The field will not be visible to users while editing an article or an contact.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:263--&amp;gt; Archived:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:264--&amp;gt; The field will no longer show on edition an article or an contact. You can open it in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#selectstatus&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Fields]] when you set the filter to archived.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:265--&amp;gt; Trashed:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:266--&amp;gt; The field is deleted but still in the database. It can be permanently deleted from the database in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#selectstatus&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Fields]] with the Empty Trash function.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:267--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J4.x:Deleting_an_Article&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:268--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Field Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:269--&amp;gt; You can assign a field to one or more field groups.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:270--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:271--&amp;gt; You can assign a field to one or more categories. Note that the default &#039;All&#039; does not include &#039;uncategorised&#039; articles.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:272--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Access&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:273--&amp;gt; Select the viewing access level for this field. The access levels depend on what has been set up in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Users: Access Levels]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:274--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:275--&amp;gt; Select the language for this field. If you are not using the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Extensions:_Languages&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|multi-language feature]] of Joomla, keep the default of &#039;All&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:276--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:277--&amp;gt; An optional field to make your personal notes for the field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options=== &amp;lt;!--T:90--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fieldshow.png|100%|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:278--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Form Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:279--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Placeholder&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:280--&amp;gt; A placeholder text which will appear inside the field as a hint for the input. The placeholder is active in the Backend while creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. You do do not see it in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:281--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Field Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:282--&amp;gt; The class attributes of the field when the field is rendered. If different classes are needed, list them with spaces.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:283--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label Class (Form)&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:327--&amp;gt; CSS class to apply to the field label when it is in edit mode (entering input into a field).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:284--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Editable In&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:285--&amp;gt; On which part of the site should the field be shown. In the Backend, in the Frontend or both?&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Showon Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;. Conditionally show or hide the field depending on the value of other fields. The syntax to use here, for example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list-of-items:value1[OR]list-of-items:value2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; list-of-items – It is the &#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039; of an already created field on which this field will depends to be show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; value1 – Is the value need have the field on which it depends to be show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; [OR] – To create a choice among multiple fields. In the example, this field will show when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field have the value: &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039; OR &#039;&#039;value2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; [AND] – To combine multiple fields. This field will show only when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field have the value: &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039; AND &#039;&#039;value2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; You can also use value &#039;does not equal&#039; as in &#039;&#039;&#039;list-of-items!:value1&#039;&#039;&#039;. The syntax will show this field only when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; is not equal to &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; To show this field when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field has been selected and have not a empty value, use the syntax &#039;&#039;list-of-items!:&#039;&#039; (without a value specified).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:286--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:287--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:288--&amp;gt; The class of the field container in the output.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:289--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Value Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:303--&amp;gt; The class of the field value in the output.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:290--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:291--&amp;gt; Show the label when the field renders.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:292--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label Class (Output)&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:328--&amp;gt; CSS class to apply to the field label when it is displayed (displaying the output of a field).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:293--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Automatic Display&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:294--&amp;gt; Joomla offers some content events which are triggered during the content creation process. This is the place to define how the fields should be integrated into content. You can choose&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:295--&amp;gt; After Title&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:296--&amp;gt; Before Display Content&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:297--&amp;gt; After Display Content&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:298--&amp;gt; Do not automatically display&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:299--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Prefix&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:329--&amp;gt; Fixed text to be displayed before a field, for example &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;£&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:300--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Suffix&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:330--&amp;gt; Fixed text to be displayed after a field, for example &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;EUR&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:301--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Layout&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:331--&amp;gt; If there is a custom layout then it would be selected here.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:302--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display When Read-Only&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:332--&amp;gt; If the field is read only (perhaps the user doesn&#039;t have the access level) should the field be displayed or hidden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Publishing=== &amp;lt;!--T:99--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-publishing-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:100--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:304--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Created Date&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:305--&amp;gt; The current time when the field was created. Enter in a different date and time or click on the calendar icon to find the desired date.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:306--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Created By&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:307--&amp;gt; Name of the User who created this field. This will default to the currently logged-in user. If you want to change this to a different user, click the Select User button.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:308--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Modified Date&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:309--&amp;gt; Date of last modification.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:310--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Modified By&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:311--&amp;gt; Username who performed the last modification.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:312--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;ID&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:313--&amp;gt; A unique identification number for this field, you cannot change this number. When creating a new field, this field displays &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; until you save the new entry.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Permissions=== &amp;lt;!--T:106--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:112--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can enter permissions for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:314--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#hierarchylevels&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-permissions-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:113--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:114--&amp;gt; To change the permissions for this field, do the following.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:115--&amp;gt; Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group&#039;&#039;&#039; by clicking its title located on the left.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:116--&amp;gt; Find the desired &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:117--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can delete this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:118--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can edit this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:119--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit State&#039;&#039;&#039;. User can change the published state and related information for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:120--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Custom Field Value.&#039;&#039;&#039; Users can edit the field value.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:121--&amp;gt; Select the desired permission for the action you wish to change.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:131--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Inherited&#039;&#039;&#039;. Inherited for users in this Group from the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#permissions&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Global Configuration]], parent group, or category.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:315--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039;. Allowed for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:316--&amp;gt; Note: If this action is Denied at one of the higher levels, the Allowed permission here will not take effect. A Denied setting cannot be overridden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:317--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Denied&#039;&#039;&#039;. Denied for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:318--&amp;gt; Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; at top. When the screen refreshes, the Calculated Setting column will show the effective permission for this Group and Action.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar== &amp;lt;!--T:126--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:221--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;#screenshot&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Screenshot]] above.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:319--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and stays in the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:320--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and closes the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:321--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:322--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves your changes to a copy of the current field. Does not affect the current field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:323--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:324--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039;. Opens this help screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips== &amp;lt;!--T:138--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:139--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to know how to use fields: [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Adding_custom_fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Managing Custom Fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information== &amp;lt;!--T:140--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Fields/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:325--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2|Content Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Needs to be marked for translation]]&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Fields:_Edit&amp;diff=997773</id>
		<title>Help4.x:Fields: Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Fields:_Edit&amp;diff=997773"/>
		<updated>2023-01-10T22:00:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description== &amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can add and edit Fields in Articles, Contacts, and Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:326--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The helpscreen show as example Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access== &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:208--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;rarr&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Users,Fields}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To add a Field:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt; click the &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039; toolbar button&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:243--&amp;gt; To edit a Field:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt; Select a &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; from the list&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{anchor|screenshot}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot== &amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-screen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|800px]]&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Form Fields== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:244--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;. The Title for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General=== &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:333--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Left Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:256--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Parameters for all fields:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:247--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Type&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:245--&amp;gt; If you create a field you can choose one of the &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; field types. When you save the field this type is permanent.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:246--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Adding_custom_fields/Calendar_Field&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:248--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:249--&amp;gt; The name will be used to identify the field. Leave this blank and Joomla will fill in a default value from the title.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:250--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:251--&amp;gt; Use a descriptive text of the field for the label of the field. This text is not translatable. If you do not enter any text for a label the title text will also used as label text.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:252--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:253--&amp;gt; The description of the field. A text that will be shown as a tool tip when the user moves the mouse over the text box while he use it in the Backend creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. This text is not translatable. You do not see this description in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:254--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:255--&amp;gt; Is this a mandatory field? In this case the field has to be filled before submitting an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:334--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:257--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:258--&amp;gt; The published status of this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:259--&amp;gt; Published:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:260--&amp;gt; The field is visible while editing an article or an contact. And it is visible in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:261--&amp;gt; Unpublished:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:262--&amp;gt; The field will not be visible to users while editing an article or an contact.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:263--&amp;gt; Archived:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:264--&amp;gt; The field will no longer show on edition an article or an contact. You can open it in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#selectstatus&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Fields]] when you set the filter to archived.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:265--&amp;gt; Trashed:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:266--&amp;gt; The field is deleted but still in the database. It can be permanently deleted from the database in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#selectstatus&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Fields]] with the Empty Trash function.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:267--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J4.x:Deleting_an_Article&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:268--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Field Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:269--&amp;gt; You can assign a field to one or more field groups.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:270--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:271--&amp;gt; You can assign a field to one or more categories. Note that the default &#039;All&#039; does not include &#039;uncategorised&#039; articles.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:272--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Access&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:273--&amp;gt; Select the viewing access level for this field. The access levels depend on what has been set up in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Users: Access Levels]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:274--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:275--&amp;gt; Select the language for this field. If you are not using the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Extensions:_Languages&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|multi-language feature]] of Joomla, keep the default of &#039;All&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:276--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:277--&amp;gt; An optional field to make your personal notes for the field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options=== &amp;lt;!--T:90--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fieldshow.png|800px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:278--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Form Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:279--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Placeholder&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:280--&amp;gt; A placeholder text which will appear inside the field as a hint for the input. The placeholder is active in the Backend while creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. You do do not see it in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:281--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Field Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:282--&amp;gt; The class attributes of the field when the field is rendered. If different classes are needed, list them with spaces.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:283--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label Class (Form)&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:327--&amp;gt; CSS class to apply to the field label when it is in edit mode (entering input into a field).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:284--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Editable In&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:285--&amp;gt; On which part of the site should the field be shown. In the Backend, in the Frontend or both?&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Showon Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;. Conditionally show or hide the field depending on the value of other fields. The syntax to use here, for example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list-of-items:value1[OR]list-of-items:value2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; list-of-items – It is the &#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039; of an already created field on which this field will depends to be show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; value1 – Is the value need have the field on which it depends to be show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; [OR] – To create a choice among multiple fields. In the example, this field will show when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field have the value: &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039; OR &#039;&#039;value2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; [AND] – To combine multiple fields. This field will show only when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field have the value: &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039; AND &#039;&#039;value2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; You can also use value &#039;does not equal&#039; as in &#039;&#039;&#039;list-of-items!:value1&#039;&#039;&#039;. The syntax will show this field only when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; is not equal to &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; To show this field when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field has been selected and have not a empty value, use the syntax &#039;&#039;list-of-items!:&#039;&#039; (without a value specified).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:286--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:287--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:288--&amp;gt; The class of the field container in the output.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:289--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Value Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:303--&amp;gt; The class of the field value in the output.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:290--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:291--&amp;gt; Show the label when the field renders.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:292--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label Class (Output)&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:328--&amp;gt; CSS class to apply to the field label when it is displayed (displaying the output of a field).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:293--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Automatic Display&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:294--&amp;gt; Joomla offers some content events which are triggered during the content creation process. This is the place to define how the fields should be integrated into content. You can choose&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:295--&amp;gt; After Title&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:296--&amp;gt; Before Display Content&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:297--&amp;gt; After Display Content&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:298--&amp;gt; Do not automatically display&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:299--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Prefix&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:329--&amp;gt; Fixed text to be displayed before a field, for example &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;£&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:300--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Suffix&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:330--&amp;gt; Fixed text to be displayed after a field, for example &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;EUR&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:301--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Layout&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:331--&amp;gt; If there is a custom layout then it would be selected here.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:302--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display When Read-Only&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:332--&amp;gt; If the field is read only (perhaps the user doesn&#039;t have the access level) should the field be displayed or hidden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Publishing=== &amp;lt;!--T:99--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-publishing-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:100--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:304--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Created Date&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:305--&amp;gt; The current time when the field was created. Enter in a different date and time or click on the calendar icon to find the desired date.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:306--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Created By&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:307--&amp;gt; Name of the User who created this field. This will default to the currently logged-in user. If you want to change this to a different user, click the Select User button.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:308--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Modified Date&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:309--&amp;gt; Date of last modification.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:310--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Modified By&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:311--&amp;gt; Username who performed the last modification.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:312--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;ID&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:313--&amp;gt; A unique identification number for this field, you cannot change this number. When creating a new field, this field displays &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; until you save the new entry.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Permissions=== &amp;lt;!--T:106--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:112--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can enter permissions for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:314--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#hierarchylevels&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-permissions-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:113--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:114--&amp;gt; To change the permissions for this field, do the following.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:115--&amp;gt; Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group&#039;&#039;&#039; by clicking its title located on the left.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:116--&amp;gt; Find the desired &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:117--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can delete this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:118--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can edit this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:119--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit State&#039;&#039;&#039;. User can change the published state and related information for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:120--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Custom Field Value.&#039;&#039;&#039; Users can edit the field value.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:121--&amp;gt; Select the desired permission for the action you wish to change.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:131--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Inherited&#039;&#039;&#039;. Inherited for users in this Group from the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#permissions&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Global Configuration]], parent group, or category.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:315--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039;. Allowed for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:316--&amp;gt; Note: If this action is Denied at one of the higher levels, the Allowed permission here will not take effect. A Denied setting cannot be overridden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:317--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Denied&#039;&#039;&#039;. Denied for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:318--&amp;gt; Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; at top. When the screen refreshes, the Calculated Setting column will show the effective permission for this Group and Action.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar== &amp;lt;!--T:126--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:221--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;#screenshot&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Screenshot]] above.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:319--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and stays in the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:320--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and closes the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:321--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:322--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves your changes to a copy of the current field. Does not affect the current field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:323--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:324--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039;. Opens this help screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips== &amp;lt;!--T:138--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:139--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to know how to use fields: [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Adding_custom_fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Managing Custom Fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information== &amp;lt;!--T:140--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Fields/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:325--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2|Content Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Needs to be marked for translation]]&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Fields:_Edit&amp;diff=997772</id>
		<title>Help4.x:Fields: Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Fields:_Edit&amp;diff=997772"/>
		<updated>2023-01-10T22:00:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description== &amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can add and edit Fields in Articles, Contacts, and Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:326--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The helpscreen show as example Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access== &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:208--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;rarr&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Users,Fields}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To add a Field:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt; click the &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039; toolbar button&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:243--&amp;gt; To edit a Field:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt; Select a &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; from the list&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{anchor|screenshot}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot== &amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-screen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|800px]]&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Form Fields== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:244--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;. The Title for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General=== &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:333--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Left Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:256--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Parameters for all fields:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:247--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Type&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:245--&amp;gt; If you create a field you can choose one of the &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; field types. When you save the field this type is permanent.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:246--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Adding_custom_fields/Calendar_Field&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:248--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:249--&amp;gt; The name will be used to identify the field. Leave this blank and Joomla will fill in a default value from the title.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:250--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:251--&amp;gt; Use a descriptive text of the field for the label of the field. This text is not translatable. If you do not enter any text for a label the title text will also used as label text.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:252--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:253--&amp;gt; The description of the field. A text that will be shown as a tool tip when the user moves the mouse over the text box while he use it in the Backend creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. This text is not translatable. You do not see this description in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:254--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:255--&amp;gt; Is this a mandatory field? In this case the field has to be filled before submitting an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:334--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:257--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:258--&amp;gt; The published status of this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:259--&amp;gt; Published:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:260--&amp;gt; The field is visible while editing an article or an contact. And it is visible in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:261--&amp;gt; Unpublished:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:262--&amp;gt; The field will not be visible to users while editing an article or an contact.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:263--&amp;gt; Archived:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:264--&amp;gt; The field will no longer show on edition an article or an contact. You can open it in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#selectstatus&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Fields]] when you set the filter to archived.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:265--&amp;gt; Trashed:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:266--&amp;gt; The field is deleted but still in the database. It can be permanently deleted from the database in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#selectstatus&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Fields]] with the Empty Trash function.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:267--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J4.x:Deleting_an_Article&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:268--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Field Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:269--&amp;gt; You can assign a field to one or more field groups.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:270--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:271--&amp;gt; You can assign a field to one or more categories. Note that the default &#039;All&#039; does not include &#039;uncategorised&#039; articles.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:272--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Access&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:273--&amp;gt; Select the viewing access level for this field. The access levels depend on what has been set up in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Users: Access Levels]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:274--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:275--&amp;gt; Select the language for this field. If you are not using the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Extensions:_Languages&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|multi-language feature]] of Joomla, keep the default of &#039;All&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:276--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:277--&amp;gt; An optional field to make your personal notes for the field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options=== &amp;lt;!--T:90--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fieldshow.png|1200px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:278--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Form Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:279--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Placeholder&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:280--&amp;gt; A placeholder text which will appear inside the field as a hint for the input. The placeholder is active in the Backend while creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. You do do not see it in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:281--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Field Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:282--&amp;gt; The class attributes of the field when the field is rendered. If different classes are needed, list them with spaces.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:283--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label Class (Form)&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:327--&amp;gt; CSS class to apply to the field label when it is in edit mode (entering input into a field).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:284--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Editable In&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:285--&amp;gt; On which part of the site should the field be shown. In the Backend, in the Frontend or both?&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Showon Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;. Conditionally show or hide the field depending on the value of other fields. The syntax to use here, for example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list-of-items:value1[OR]list-of-items:value2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; list-of-items – It is the &#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039; of an already created field on which this field will depends to be show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; value1 – Is the value need have the field on which it depends to be show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; [OR] – To create a choice among multiple fields. In the example, this field will show when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field have the value: &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039; OR &#039;&#039;value2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; [AND] – To combine multiple fields. This field will show only when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field have the value: &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039; AND &#039;&#039;value2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; You can also use value &#039;does not equal&#039; as in &#039;&#039;&#039;list-of-items!:value1&#039;&#039;&#039;. The syntax will show this field only when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; is not equal to &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; To show this field when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field has been selected and have not a empty value, use the syntax &#039;&#039;list-of-items!:&#039;&#039; (without a value specified).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:286--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:287--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:288--&amp;gt; The class of the field container in the output.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:289--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Value Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:303--&amp;gt; The class of the field value in the output.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:290--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:291--&amp;gt; Show the label when the field renders.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:292--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label Class (Output)&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:328--&amp;gt; CSS class to apply to the field label when it is displayed (displaying the output of a field).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:293--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Automatic Display&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:294--&amp;gt; Joomla offers some content events which are triggered during the content creation process. This is the place to define how the fields should be integrated into content. You can choose&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:295--&amp;gt; After Title&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:296--&amp;gt; Before Display Content&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:297--&amp;gt; After Display Content&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:298--&amp;gt; Do not automatically display&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:299--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Prefix&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:329--&amp;gt; Fixed text to be displayed before a field, for example &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;£&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:300--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Suffix&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:330--&amp;gt; Fixed text to be displayed after a field, for example &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;EUR&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:301--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Layout&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:331--&amp;gt; If there is a custom layout then it would be selected here.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:302--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display When Read-Only&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:332--&amp;gt; If the field is read only (perhaps the user doesn&#039;t have the access level) should the field be displayed or hidden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Publishing=== &amp;lt;!--T:99--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-publishing-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:100--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:304--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Created Date&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:305--&amp;gt; The current time when the field was created. Enter in a different date and time or click on the calendar icon to find the desired date.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:306--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Created By&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:307--&amp;gt; Name of the User who created this field. This will default to the currently logged-in user. If you want to change this to a different user, click the Select User button.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:308--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Modified Date&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:309--&amp;gt; Date of last modification.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:310--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Modified By&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:311--&amp;gt; Username who performed the last modification.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:312--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;ID&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:313--&amp;gt; A unique identification number for this field, you cannot change this number. When creating a new field, this field displays &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; until you save the new entry.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Permissions=== &amp;lt;!--T:106--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:112--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can enter permissions for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:314--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#hierarchylevels&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-permissions-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:113--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:114--&amp;gt; To change the permissions for this field, do the following.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:115--&amp;gt; Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group&#039;&#039;&#039; by clicking its title located on the left.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:116--&amp;gt; Find the desired &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:117--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can delete this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:118--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can edit this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:119--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit State&#039;&#039;&#039;. User can change the published state and related information for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:120--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Custom Field Value.&#039;&#039;&#039; Users can edit the field value.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:121--&amp;gt; Select the desired permission for the action you wish to change.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:131--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Inherited&#039;&#039;&#039;. Inherited for users in this Group from the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#permissions&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Global Configuration]], parent group, or category.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:315--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039;. Allowed for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:316--&amp;gt; Note: If this action is Denied at one of the higher levels, the Allowed permission here will not take effect. A Denied setting cannot be overridden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:317--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Denied&#039;&#039;&#039;. Denied for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:318--&amp;gt; Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; at top. When the screen refreshes, the Calculated Setting column will show the effective permission for this Group and Action.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar== &amp;lt;!--T:126--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:221--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;#screenshot&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Screenshot]] above.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:319--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and stays in the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:320--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and closes the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:321--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:322--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves your changes to a copy of the current field. Does not affect the current field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:323--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:324--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039;. Opens this help screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips== &amp;lt;!--T:138--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:139--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to know how to use fields: [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Adding_custom_fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Managing Custom Fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information== &amp;lt;!--T:140--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Fields/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:325--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2|Content Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Needs to be marked for translation]]&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Fields:_Edit&amp;diff=997771</id>
		<title>Help4.x:Fields: Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help4.x:Fields:_Edit&amp;diff=997771"/>
		<updated>2023-01-10T21:58:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description== &amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can add and edit Fields in Articles, Contacts, and Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:326--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The helpscreen show as example Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access== &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:208--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;rarr&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Users,Fields}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To add a Field:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt; click the &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039; toolbar button&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:243--&amp;gt; To edit a Field:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt; Select a &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; from the list&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{anchor|screenshot}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot== &amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-screen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|800px]]&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Form Fields== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:244--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;. The Title for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General=== &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:333--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Left Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:256--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Parameters for all fields:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:247--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Type&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:245--&amp;gt; If you create a field you can choose one of the &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; field types. When you save the field this type is permanent.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:246--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Adding_custom_fields/Calendar_Field&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:248--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:249--&amp;gt; The name will be used to identify the field. Leave this blank and Joomla will fill in a default value from the title.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:250--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:251--&amp;gt; Use a descriptive text of the field for the label of the field. This text is not translatable. If you do not enter any text for a label the title text will also used as label text.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:252--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:253--&amp;gt; The description of the field. A text that will be shown as a tool tip when the user moves the mouse over the text box while he use it in the Backend creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. This text is not translatable. You do not see this description in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:254--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:255--&amp;gt; Is this a mandatory field? In this case the field has to be filled before submitting an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:334--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right Panel&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:257--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:258--&amp;gt; The published status of this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:259--&amp;gt; Published:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:260--&amp;gt; The field is visible while editing an article or an contact. And it is visible in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:261--&amp;gt; Unpublished:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:262--&amp;gt; The field will not be visible to users while editing an article or an contact.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:263--&amp;gt; Archived:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:264--&amp;gt; The field will no longer show on edition an article or an contact. You can open it in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#selectstatus&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Fields]] when you set the filter to archived.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:265--&amp;gt; Trashed:&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:266--&amp;gt; The field is deleted but still in the database. It can be permanently deleted from the database in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#selectstatus&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Fields]] with the Empty Trash function.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:267--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J4.x:Deleting_an_Article&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:268--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Field Group&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:269--&amp;gt; You can assign a field to one or more field groups.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:270--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:271--&amp;gt; You can assign a field to one or more categories. Note that the default &#039;All&#039; does not include &#039;uncategorised&#039; articles.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:272--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Access&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:273--&amp;gt; Select the viewing access level for this field. The access levels depend on what has been set up in [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Users: Access Levels]].&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:274--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:275--&amp;gt; Select the language for this field. If you are not using the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Extensions:_Languages&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|multi-language feature]] of Joomla, keep the default of &#039;All&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:276--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:277--&amp;gt; An optional field to make your personal notes for the field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options=== &amp;lt;!--T:90--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fieldshow.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-options-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:91--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:278--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Form Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:279--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Placeholder&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:280--&amp;gt; A placeholder text which will appear inside the field as a hint for the input. The placeholder is active in the Backend while creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. You do do not see it in the Frontend.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:281--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Field Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:282--&amp;gt; The class attributes of the field when the field is rendered. If different classes are needed, list them with spaces.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:283--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label Class (Form)&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:327--&amp;gt; CSS class to apply to the field label when it is in edit mode (entering input into a field).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:284--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Editable In&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:285--&amp;gt; On which part of the site should the field be shown. In the Backend, in the Frontend or both?&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Showon Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;. Conditionally show or hide the field depending on the value of other fields. The syntax to use here, for example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list-of-items:value1[OR]list-of-items:value2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; list-of-items – It is the &#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039; of an already created field on which this field will depends to be show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; value1 – Is the value need have the field on which it depends to be show.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; [OR] – To create a choice among multiple fields. In the example, this field will show when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field have the value: &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039; OR &#039;&#039;value2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; [AND] – To combine multiple fields. This field will show only when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field have the value: &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039; AND &#039;&#039;value2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; You can also use value &#039;does not equal&#039; as in &#039;&#039;&#039;list-of-items!:value1&#039;&#039;&#039;. The syntax will show this field only when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; is not equal to &#039;&#039;value1&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt; To show this field when &#039;&#039;list-of-items&#039;&#039; field has been selected and have not a empty value, use the syntax &#039;&#039;list-of-items!:&#039;&#039; (without a value specified).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:286--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:287--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:288--&amp;gt; The class of the field container in the output.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:289--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Value Class&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:303--&amp;gt; The class of the field value in the output.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:290--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:291--&amp;gt; Show the label when the field renders.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:292--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Label Class (Output)&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:328--&amp;gt; CSS class to apply to the field label when it is displayed (displaying the output of a field).&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:293--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Automatic Display&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:294--&amp;gt; Joomla offers some content events which are triggered during the content creation process. This is the place to define how the fields should be integrated into content. You can choose&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:295--&amp;gt; After Title&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:296--&amp;gt; Before Display Content&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:297--&amp;gt; After Display Content&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:298--&amp;gt; Do not automatically display&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:299--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Prefix&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:329--&amp;gt; Fixed text to be displayed before a field, for example &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;£&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:300--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Suffix&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:330--&amp;gt; Fixed text to be displayed after a field, for example &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;EUR&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:301--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Layout&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:331--&amp;gt; If there is a custom layout then it would be selected here.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:302--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Display When Read-Only&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:332--&amp;gt; If the field is read only (perhaps the user doesn&#039;t have the access level) should the field be displayed or hidden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Publishing=== &amp;lt;!--T:99--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-publishing-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:100--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:304--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Created Date&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:305--&amp;gt; The current time when the field was created. Enter in a different date and time or click on the calendar icon to find the desired date.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:306--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Created By&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:307--&amp;gt; Name of the User who created this field. This will default to the currently logged-in user. If you want to change this to a different user, click the Select User button.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:308--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Modified Date&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:309--&amp;gt; Date of last modification.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:310--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Modified By&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:311--&amp;gt; Username who performed the last modification.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:312--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;ID&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:313--&amp;gt; A unique identification number for this field, you cannot change this number. When creating a new field, this field displays &amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt; until you save the new entry.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Permissions=== &amp;lt;!--T:106--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:112--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can enter permissions for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt; &amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:314--&amp;gt; [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#hierarchylevels&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Learn more.]]&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-permissions-subscreen-&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:113--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;.png|600px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:114--&amp;gt; To change the permissions for this field, do the following.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:115--&amp;gt; Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Group&#039;&#039;&#039; by clicking its title located on the left.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:116--&amp;gt; Find the desired &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:117--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can delete this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:118--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;. Users can edit this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:119--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit State&#039;&#039;&#039;. User can change the published state and related information for this field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:120--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Custom Field Value.&#039;&#039;&#039; Users can edit the field value.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:121--&amp;gt; Select the desired permission for the action you wish to change.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:131--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Inherited&#039;&#039;&#039;. Inherited for users in this Group from the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en&amp;lt;tvar name=2&amp;gt;#permissions&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Global Configuration]], parent group, or category.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:315--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed&#039;&#039;&#039;. Allowed for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;{{-}}&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:316--&amp;gt; Note: If this action is Denied at one of the higher levels, the Allowed permission here will not take effect. A Denied setting cannot be overridden.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:317--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Denied&#039;&#039;&#039;. Denied for users in this Group.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:318--&amp;gt; Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; at top. When the screen refreshes, the Calculated Setting column will show the effective permission for this Group and Action.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar== &amp;lt;!--T:126--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:221--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;#screenshot&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;|Screenshot]] above.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:319--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and stays in the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:320--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and closes the current screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:321--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves the field and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:322--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. Saves your changes to a copy of the current field. Does not affect the current field.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:323--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039;. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:324--&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039;. Opens this help screen.&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips== &amp;lt;!--T:138--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:139--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to know how to use fields: [[&amp;lt;tvar name=1&amp;gt;J3.x:Adding_custom_fields&amp;lt;/tvar&amp;gt;/en|Managing Custom Fields]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information== &amp;lt;!--T:140--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Fields/&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--T:325--&amp;gt; en&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2|Content Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Needs to be marked for translation]]&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=File:Fieldshow.png&amp;diff=997770</id>
		<title>File:Fieldshow.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=File:Fieldshow.png&amp;diff=997770"/>
		<updated>2023-01-10T21:53:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Carlitorweb: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Field options&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Carlitorweb</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>